Mercedes - Type 300 - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Apple® iOS Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Android™ Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung You can also use the C‑Class Guide smartphone App: 2055844501Z102 É2055844501Z102ÁËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31 Introduction ......................................... 24 Safety ................................................... 41 Opening and closing ........................... 89 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 117 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 133 Climate control ................................. 149 Driving and parking .......................... 179 On-board computer and displays .... 291 Stowing and features ....................... 367 Maintenance and care ...................... 389 Breakdown assistance ..................... 405 Wheels and tyres .............................. 427 Technical data ................................... 465 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 4MATIC off-road system ................... 12 V socket see Sockets 230 V power socket .......................... 360° camera Cleaning ......................................... Function/notes ............................. 235 235 382 401 249 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 315 Function/notes ................................ 74 Important safety notes .................... 75 Warning lamp ................................. 355 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 165 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 157 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 309 Display message ............................ 339 Function/notes ............................. 263 Towing a trailer .............................. 266 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 309 Display message ............................ 338 Function/notes ............................. 266 Towing a trailer .............................. 269 Active light function ......................... 138 Active Light System Display message ............................ 331 Active Parking Assist Detecting parking spaces .............. 240 Display message ............................ 339 Exiting a parking space .................. 243 Function/notes ............................. 239 Important safety notes .................. 239 Parking .......................................... 241 Towing a trailer .............................. 239 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 82 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 79 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 80 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 235 Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS Display messages .......................... 332 Function/notes ............................. 139 Switching on/off ........................... 140 AdBlue® Additive ......................................... 473 Display message ............................ 336 Displaying level and range ............. 307 Filling capacity ............................... 473 Important safety notes .................. 472 Low outside temperatures ............. 473 Purity ............................................. 473 Topping up ..................................... 204 Additional speedometer ................... 312 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 474 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 136 AGILITY SELECT switch Automatic transmission ................. 197 Climate control (THERMATIC) ........ 153 Climate control (THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 156 Hybrid operation ............................ 277 Manual transmission ...................... 191 Air filter (white display message) .... 336 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes .................. 177 Rear ............................................... 178 Setting ........................................... 177 Setting the centre air vents ........... 178 Setting the side air vents ............... 178 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Introduction ..................................... 51 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 46 Index Airbags Display message ............................ 328 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 52 Important safety guidelines ............. 51 Kneebag ........................................... 53 Sidebag ............................................ 53 Triggering ......................................... 60 Windowbag ...................................... 53 AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 337 Function/notes ............................. 234 AIRPANEL (cleaning instructions) .... 400 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 85 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 85 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 85 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-glare film .................................... 387 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 214 Armrest Stowage compartment .................. 370 Ashtray ............................................... 379 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 306 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 307 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 395 Hiding a service message .............. 395 Notes ............................................. 395 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 395 Service message ............................ 395 Special service requirements ......... 396 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 85 Function ........................................... 85 Switching off the alarm .................... 85 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 309 Display message ............................ 337 Function/notes ............................. 255 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 332 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 187 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 186 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 328 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 54 Problems ......................................... 59 System self-test ............................... 57 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 135 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 196 AGILITY SELECT switch .................. 197 Changing gear ............................... 196 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 193 Display message ............................ 345 Drive program display .................... 195 Drive programs .............................. 197 Driving tips .................................... 196 Emergency running mode .............. 200 Engaging drive position .................. 195 Engaging neutral ............................ 194 Engaging park position automatically ............................................... 194 Engaging reverse gear ................... 194 Engaging the park position ............ 193 Kickdown ....................................... 196 Manual shifting .............................. 198 Overview ........................................ 193 Problem (fault) ............................... 200 Pulling away ................................... 184 Starting the engine ........................ 183 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 198 Trailer towing ................................. 196 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 195 Transmission positions .................. 195 5 6 Index Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Auxiliary heating/ventilation Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Setting the departure time ............. Switching on/off (on the centre console) ......................................... Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 200 172 177 173 175 173 480 B Bag hook ............................................ 374 Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 286 Folding out ..................................... 285 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 75 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist PLUS with CrossTraffic Assist) Function/notes ................................ 75 Important safety notes .................... 76 Battery (high-voltage) see High-voltage battery Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 94 Important safety notes .................... 93 Replacing ......................................... 94 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 416 Display message ............................ 334 Important safety notes .................. 412 Jump starting ................................. 418 Belt see Seat belts Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 60 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 309 Display message ............................ 339 Notes/function .............................. 259 Trailer towing ................................. 261 see Active Blind Spot Assist BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ............................. 472 BlueTEC® Topping up AdBlue® ....................... 204 Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 390 Closing ........................................... 392 Display message ............................ 347 Important safety notes .................. 390 Opening ......................................... 391 Boot Emergency release ........................ 105 Important safety notes .................. 101 Locking separately ......................... 105 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ................................... 104 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................. 102 Opening/closing (from the outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .......... 103 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ......................................... 102 Boot lid Display message ............................ 347 Obstacle recognition ...................... 101 Opening dimensions ...................... 476 Opening/closing ............................ 101 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 476 Box (boot) ........................................... 374 Brake EBD .................................................. 82 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 322 Notes ............................................. 475 Brake force distribution, electronic see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 80 Display message ............................ 330 Brake pedal Pedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 44 Brakes ABS .................................................. 74 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 79 Index BAS .................................................. 75 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 75 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 475 Display message ............................ 315 Driving tips .................................... 213 Hill start assist ............................... 185 HOLD function ............................... 232 Important safety notes .................. 213 Parking brake ................................ 209 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) ................................................. 44 RBS warning lamp .......................... 362 Warning lamp ................................. 353 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 32 Bulbs see Replacing bulbs Buttons on the steering column ...... 294 C Calling up a fault see Display messages Camera see 360° camera Car see Vehicle Car key see Key Car wash (care) ................................. Care 360° camera ................................. AIRPANEL ...................................... Automatic car wash ....................... Carpets .......................................... Display ........................................... Exhaust pipe .................................. Exterior lighting ............................. Gear or selector lever .................... High-pressure cleaner .................... Interior ........................................... Matt paintwork .............................. Notes ............................................. Paint .............................................. 396 401 400 396 404 402 402 400 403 398 402 399 396 398 Plastic trim .................................... 403 Reversing camera .......................... 401 Roof lining ...................................... 404 Seat belt ........................................ 404 Seat cover ..................................... 403 Sensors ......................................... 401 Steering wheel ............................... 403 Trim pieces .................................... 403 Washing by hand ........................... 398 Wheels ........................................... 399 Windows ........................................ 399 Wiper blades .................................. 400 Wooden trim .................................. 403 CD player/CD changer(on-board computer) .......................................... 303 Central locking Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 91 Centre console Lower section .................................. 38 Upper section .................................. 37 Changing bulbs Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 143 Main-beam headlamps ................... 143 Reversing lamps ............................ 144 Turn signals (front) ......................... 144 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 144 Charge status of high-voltage battery ..................................................... 273 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 68 ISOFIX .............................................. 65 On the front-passenger seat ............ 66 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 67 Recommendations ........................... 71 Suitable positions ............................ 68 Top Tether ....................................... 65 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 72 Rear doors ....................................... 73 Children In the vehicle ................................... 63 Restraint systems ............................ 64 Cigarette lighter ................................ 380 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 400 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 402 Climate control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 172 7 8 Index Controlling automatically ............... Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. Cooling with air dehumidification .. Demisting the windows .................. Demisting the windscreen ............. ECO start/stop function ................ ECO start/stop function (THERMATIC) ................................. Hybrid vehicle (THERMOTRONIC) .. Hybrid vehicles (THERMATIC) ........ Important safety notes .................. Indicator lamp ................................ Information about using THERMATIC automatic climate control ........................................... Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. Ionisation ....................................... Overview of systems ...................... Perfume atomizer .......................... Pre-entry climate control ............... Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ Rear control panel ......................... Remote activation of heating/ ventilation systems ........................ Setting the air distribution ............. Setting the air vents ...................... Setting the airflow ......................... Setting the climate mode ............... Setting the temperature ................ Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ Switching on/off ........................... Switching residual heat on/off ...... Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... Switching the synchronisation function on and off ........................ THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) ............................. THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 159 165 157 163 163 155 152 155 152 150 159 152 155 169 150 167 169 165 159 154 171 161 177 162 160 160 165 156 166 164 162 151 154 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 Collapsible emergency spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 308 Display message ............................ 322 Operation/notes .............................. 77 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 402 Combination switch .......................... 137 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 299 Convenience box ............................... 374 Convenience closing feature ............ 107 Convenience opening feature .......... 107 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 165 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 393 Display message ............................ 333 Important safety notes .................. 475 Temperature display in the instrument cluster .................................. 293 Temperature display in the onboard computer ............................. 307 Warning lamp ................................. 360 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 29 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 329 Function/notes ............................. 138 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 141 Crosswind Assist ................................. 82 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 216 Deactivating ................................... 218 Display message ............................ 342 Driving system ............................... 216 Important safety notes .................. 216 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 216 Selecting ........................................ 217 Setting a speed .............................. 218 Index Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear compartment ......................... 217 377 376 378 D Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 331 Function/notes ............................. 135 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity ................. 27 Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Diesel .................................................. 471 Digital speedometer ......................... 299 Dipped-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 143 Display message ............................ 329 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 134 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 311 Switching on/off ........................... 135 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 193 Display Charge status of the high-voltage battery ........................................... 273 see Display message see Warning and indicator lamps Display message Driving systems ............................. 337 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 395 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 314 Engine ............................................ 333 General information ....................... 314 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 314 Hybrid system ................................ 337 Introduction ................................... 314 Key ................................................ 350 Lights ............................................. 329 Safety systems .............................. 315 Tyres .............................................. 343 Vehicle ........................................... 345 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 77 Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 363 DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 224 Activation conditions ..................... 224 Cruise control lever ....................... 223 Deactivating ................................... 228 Display message ............................ 340 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 228 Driving tips .................................... 229 Function/notes ............................. 222 Important safety notes .................. 222 Selecting ........................................ 223 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 227 Door Automatic locking (switch) ............... 98 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 91 Control panel ................................... 40 Display message ............................ 347 Emergency locking ........................ 100 Emergency unlocking ....................... 98 Important safety notes .................... 96 Opening (from the inside) ................ 97 Drive program Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 195 Manual transmission ...................... 192 Drive programs Automatic transmission ................. 197 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 396 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 134 Driving Assistance package ............. 263 Driving on flooded roads .................. 215 Driving safety system BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 75 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 77 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 82 9 10 Index Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 74 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 82 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 79 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 80 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 75 Distance warning function ............... 77 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 80 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 80 Important safety guidelines ............. 74 Overview .......................................... 74 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 82 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) ................................................. 44 STEER CONTROL ............................. 85 Driving system DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 230 Driving systems 360°camera .................................. 249 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 263 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 266 Active Parking Assist ..................... 239 AIRMATIC ...................................... 234 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 255 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 259 Cruise control ................................ 216 Display message ............................ 337 Distronic Plus ................................ 222 Driving Assistance package ........... 263 HOLD function ............................... 232 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 261 Lane package ................................ 259 PARKTRONIC ................................. 236 Reversing camera .......................... 244 SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 219 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 256 Driving tips Aquaplaning ................................... 214 Automatic transmission ................. 196 Brakes ........................................... 213 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 229 Downhill gradient ........................... 213 Driving abroad ............................... 134 Driving in winter ............................. 215 Driving on flooded roads ................ 215 Driving on wet roads ...................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake disks ............................ New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. The first 1500 km .......................... Towing a trailer .............................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 214 211 211 215 214 214 214 180 431 134 180 284 214 303 E EASY-ENTRY feature Function/notes ............................. 126 EASY-EXIT feature Function/notes ............................. 126 EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 374 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 318 Function/notes ................................ 82 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 211 On-board computer ....................... 298 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 187 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 186 Climate control (THERMATIC) ........ 153 Climate control (THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 156 Deactivating/activating ................. 187 General information ....................... 186 Important safety notes .................. 186 Introduction ................................... 186 Electric motor Power display ................................ 272 see Hybrid operation Electric motor power display ........... 272 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Index Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63 Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 98 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 93 Inserting .......................................... 93 Locking vehicle .............................. 100 Removing ......................................... 93 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 98 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 461 Important safety notes .................. 461 Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ............................................. 462 Technical data ............................... 464 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ............................................. 98 Energy flow display ........................... 273 Engine Display message ............................ 333 ECO start/stop function ................ 186 Engine number ............................... 468 Jump-starting ................................. 418 Running irregularly ......................... 189 Starting problems .......................... 189 Starting the engine with the key .... 183 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 184 Stopping ........................................ 208 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 424 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 360 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 466 Problem (fault) ............................... 189 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 474 Checking the oil level ..................... 392 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 392 Display message ............................ 335 Filling capacity ............................... 474 Notes about oil grades ................... 473 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 392 Topping up ..................................... 392 Viscosity ........................................ 474 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 24 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating ................... 81 Characteristics ................................. 81 Deactivating/activating ................. 307 Display message ............................ 315 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 80 Function/notes ................................ 80 General notes .................................. 80 Important safety guidelines ............. 80 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 82 Warning lamp ................................. 357 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 80 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... 402 Exhaustive discharging (high-voltage battery) ....................................... 415 Extended overrun mode ................... 280 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... 400 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 128 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 129 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 128 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 128 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 129 Parking position ............................. 129 Resetting ....................................... 128 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 131 F Fault message see Display messages Features ............................................. 376 Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 407 11 12 Index First-aid kit ......................................... 406 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 442 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 443 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 438 Raising the vehicle ......................... 439 Removing a wheel .......................... 442 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 439 Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel ................................... 437 MOExtended tyres ......................... 408 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 408 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 409 see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. 387 Foglamps (extended range) .............. 139 Fording On flooded roads ........................... 215 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 466 Two-way radio ................................ 466 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 328 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 54 Problems ......................................... 59 System self-test ............................... 57 Fuel Additives ........................................ 471 Consumption information .............. 472 Consumption statistics .................. 299 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 298 Displaying the range ...................... 298 Driving tips .................................... 211 E10 ................................................ 470 Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Grade (petrol) ................................ 470 Important safety notes .................. 469 Low outside temperatures ............. 472 Problem (malfunction) ................... 203 Quality (diesel) ............................... 471 Refuelling ....................................... 200 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 470 Fuel consumption (Audio 20) ........... 276 Fuel consumption (COMAND Online) ................................................ 276 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 202 Fuel filter (white display message) .. 336 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 298 Gauge .............................................. 34 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 470 Problem (malfunction) ................... 203 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 426 Before changing ............................. 425 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 425 Fuse box in the boot ...................... 426 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 426 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 425 Important safety notes .................. 424 G Generated electrical energy (Audio 20) ...................................................... Generated electrical energy (COMAND Online) .............................. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... Glove compartment .......................... 276 276 24 369 H Handbrake see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS ....................... Hazard warning lamps ...................... Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... Adjusting (electrically) ................... Adjusting (manually) ...................... Adjusting (rear) .............................. Fitting/removing (rear) .................. Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ Function/notes ............................. 103 137 121 122 122 122 122 310 295 Index Important safety notes .................. 295 Setting the position ....................... 310 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 131 Switching on or off ......................... 296 Switching the display on/off ......... 310 Headlamp Cleaning system (notes) ................ 476 Headlamp flasher .............................. 137 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 140 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 398 High-voltage battery Charge level ................................... 273 Charging ........................................ 416 Charging (on-board computer) ....... 274 General notes .................................. 43 Vehicle fire ....................................... 43 Hill start assist .................................. 185 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 233 Deactivating ................................... 233 Display message ............................ 340 Function/notes ............................. 232 Horn ...................................................... 32 Hybrid drive Displaying the total range .............. 276 Generated electrical energy ........... 276 Hybrid operation AGILITY SELECT switch .................. 277 Automatic engine start (ECO Start/Stop function) ...................... 280 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) ....................... 280 Driving tips .................................... 278 ECO start/stop function ................ 279 Energy flow display ........................ 273 Extended overrun mode ................. 280 Fuel consumption .......................... 276 General notes ................................ 269 Important safety notes .................. 269 Manual gearshifting ....................... 278 Noiseless start ............................... 277 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 273 Overrun mode ................................ 280 Overview (instrument cluster) ........ 272 Power display (electric motor) ....... 272 Problems ....................................... 282 Pulling away ................................... 277 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) ............................................... 269 Resetting values (Audio 20) ........... 276 Resetting values (COMAND Online) ........................................... 276 Starting the engine ........................ 276 Hybrid system Automatic deactivation .................... 42 Danger of electric shock .................. 42 Display message ............................ 337 High-voltage battery ........................ 43 Important safety notes .................... 42 Manual deactivation ......................... 43 Opening the bonnet ......................... 44 Overview ........................................ 271 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 282 READY indicator ............................. 276 Warning lamp ................................. 362 Hybrid vehicle Climate control (THERMATIC) ........ 153 Climate control (THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 156 Hybrid vehicles Important safety notes .................... 42 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 85 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 359 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 363 Coolant .......................................... 360 Engine diagnostics ......................... 360 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 330 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Insect protection on the radiator .... 392 13 14 Index Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 34 Power display ................................ 272 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 292 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 311 Display message ............................ 331 Overview ........................................ 138 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left .. 311 Interior lighting Control ........................................... 141 Emergency lighting ........................ 141 Overview ........................................ 140 Reading lamp ................................. 140 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 87 Function ........................................... 86 Priming ............................................ 86 Switching off .................................... 87 Internal combustion engine Malfunction .................................... 282 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 65 J Jack Storage location ............................ 407 Using ............................................. 439 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 418 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 94 Checking the battery ....................... 94 Convenience closing feature .......... 108 Convenience opening feature ........ 107 Display message ............................ 350 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 91 Emergency key element ................... 93 Important safety notes .................... 90 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 92 Loss ................................................. 95 Modifying the programming ............. 92 Overview .......................................... 90 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 181 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95 Starting the engine ........................ 183 Key positions Key ................................................ 181 Start/Stop button .......................... 181 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ...................... 108 Deactivation ..................................... 91 Locking ............................................ 91 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 182 Unlocking ......................................... 91 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 196 Kneebag ............................................... 53 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ Display message ............................ Function/information .................... see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane package ..................................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light sensor (display message) ....... Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Active light function ....................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Headlamp range ............................ Intelligent Light System (function) ............................................... Light switch ................................... 309 338 261 259 373 331 332 311 138 139 135 138 135 134 139 137 137 136 138 134 Index Main-beam headlamps ................... 137 Misted up headlamps .................... 140 Motorway mode ............................. 138 Parking lamps ................................ 136 Rear foglamp ................................. 135 Setting exterior lighting ................. 134 Side lamps ..................................... 136 Turn signals ................................... 137 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 216 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 223 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 219 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 368 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 98 Emergency locking ........................ 100 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 97 Locking centrally see Central locking Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 123 M M+S tyres ........................................... Main-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... Changing bulbs .............................. Display message ............................ Switching on/off ........................... Manual transmission AGILITY SELECT switch .................. Drive program ................................ Engaging reverse gear ................... Gear lever ...................................... Pulling away ................................... Shift recommendation ................... Shifting to neutral .......................... Starting the engine ........................ Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 430 139 143 331 137 191 192 191 190 184 191 191 183 399 Memory card (audio) ......................... 303 Memory function Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 130 Mercedes-Benz Contact Info call button .............................. 385 Roadside Assistance call button .... 385 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Switch in the overhead control panel .............................................. 384 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360°camera .................................. 249 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 263 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 266 Active Parking Assist ..................... 239 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 255 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 259 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 222 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 230 General notes ................................ 216 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 261 PARKTRONIC ................................. 236 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 62 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 62 Reversing camera .......................... 244 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 256 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 314 Messages see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 400 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 466 Installation ..................................... 466 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 304 15 16 Index Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 386 Transmission output (maximum) .... 466 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 92 MOExtended tyres ............................. 408 Motorway mode ................................ 138 MP3 Operating ....................................... 303 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 295 Permanent display ......................... 312 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 294 Overview .......................................... 36 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 300 Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 180 O Occupant safety Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 63 Children in the vehicle ..................... 63 Important safety notes .................... 45 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 74 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 62 Seat belts ........................................ 47 Odometer ........................................... 298 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Assistance graphic menu ............... 306 Assistance menu ........................... 307 Display messages .......................... 314 Displaying a service message ........ 395 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 228 Factory settings ............................. 313 Head-up display ............................. 295 Important safety notes .................. 292 Instrument cluster menu ............... 312 Light menu ..................................... 311 Media menu ................................... 302 Menu overview .............................. 297 Message memory .......................... 314 Navigation menu ............................ 300 Operating the TV ............................ 304 Operating video DVD ..................... 303 Operation ....................................... 294 Radio menu ................................... 302 Service menu ................................. 306 Settings menu ............................... 307 Standard display ............................ 298 Telephone menu ............................ 304 Trip menu ...................................... 298 Vehicle menu ................................. 313 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 144 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 25 Operating mode Overrun mode ................................ 279 Stationary vehicle .......................... 278 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Important safety note ...................... 25 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 293 Overhead control panel ...................... 39 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 73 Overrun mode .................................... 280 Overrun mode, extended .................. 280 Owner's Manual Overview .......................................... 25 P Paint code .......................................... 468 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 398 Panic alarm .......................................... 44 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety information ......... 110 Opening/closing ............................ 112 Problem (malfunction) ................... 115 Rain closing feature ....................... 113 Resetting ....................................... 114 Parking Hybrid vehicles .............................. 281 Important safety notes .................. 207 Parking brake ................................ 209 Index Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 129 Reversing camera .......................... 244 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 239 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 318 Electric parking brake .................... 209 Warning lamp ................................. 359 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 331 Switching on/off ........................... 136 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 238 Driving system ............................... 236 Function/notes ............................. 236 Important safety notes .................. 236 Problem (fault) ............................... 239 Sensor range ................................. 236 Trailer towing ................................. 236 Warning display ............................. 237 PASSENGER AIR BAG Indicator lamps ................................ 46 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Problem (malfunction) ................... 328 Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 167 Perfume vial ................................... 167 Problem (malfunction) ................... 169 Petrol .................................................. 470 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 74 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 403 Power windows see Side windows Pre-entry climate control Problem (Malfunction) ................... 171 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 62 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 323 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 309 Display message ............................ 323 Function/notes ................................ 82 Important safety notes .................... 83 Warning lamp ................................. 363 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Operation ......................................... 62 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 85 Immobiliser ...................................... 85 Interior motion sensor ..................... 86 Tow-away protection ........................ 86 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 24 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 184 Hill start assist ............................... 185 Hybrid operation ............................ 277 Manual transmission ...................... 184 Trailer ............................................ 185 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 R Radiator cover ................................... 392 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 302 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Rain closing feature Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 113 Sliding sunroof ............................... 112 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) Driving safety systems ..................... 44 Important safety notes .................... 44 Warning lamp ................................. 362 Reading lamp ..................................... 140 READY indicator ................................ 276 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 178 17 18 Index Setting the airflow ......................... 162 Setting the temperature ................ 160 Rear foglamp Display message ............................ 331 Switching on/off ........................... 135 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seat Display message ............................ 347 Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 372 Rear window blind ............................ 379 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 165 Switching on/off ........................... 164 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 50 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 129 Dipping (manual) ........................... 127 Recuperation display ........................ 298 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Important safety notes .................. 200 Refuelling process ......................... 201 see Fuel Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 173 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 175 Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 141 Important safety notes .................. 142 Overview of bulb types .................. 142 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 143 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 175 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 335 Warning lamp ................................. 360 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 166 Restraint system Display message ............................ 325 Introduction ..................................... 44 Warning lamp ................................. 359 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45 Rev counter ........................................ 293 Reverse gear Engaging (manual transmission) .... 191 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 401 Function/notes ............................. 244 Switching on/off ........................... 245 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 111 Roller sunblinds ............................. 113 Side windows ................................. 106 Sliding sunroof ............................... 111 Reversing function Boot lid .......................................... 101 Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 144 Reversing lamp (display message) .. 331 Roller sunblind Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 113 Rear window .................................. 379 Roller sunblinds (panorama sliding sunroof) Operating ....................................... 114 Roof carrier ........................................ 376 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 404 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 476 S Safety Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system .............. Child restraint systems .................... Children in the vehicle ..................... see Operating safety Safety notes Hybrid vehicles ................................ Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat belt Centre rear-compartment seat ........ Correct usage .................................. Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 54 64 63 42 49 48 50 Index Adjusting the height ......................... 49 Cleaning ......................................... 404 Display message ............................ 324 Fastening ......................................... 49 Important safety guidelines ............. 47 Introduction ..................................... 47 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 50 Releasing ......................................... 49 Warning lamp ................................. 351 Warning lamp (function) ................... 50 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 121 Adjusting (manually and electrically) .............................................. 120 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 123 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 121 Cleaning the cover ......................... 403 Correct driver's seat position ........ 118 Important safety notes .................. 119 Seat heating .................................. 123 Seat heating problem .................... 124 Seat ventilation .............................. 124 Seat ventilation problem ................ 125 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 131 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 123 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 124 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 403 see Automatic transmission Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 401 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 306 Service products AdBlue® special additives .............. 472 Brake fluid ..................................... 475 Coolant (engine) ............................ 475 Engine oil ....................................... 473 Fuel ................................................ 468 Important safety notes .................. 468 Washer fluid ................................... 476 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 313 On-board computer ....................... 307 Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ............................................. 191 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 136 Side windows Convenience closing ...................... 107 Convenience opening .................... 107 Important safety notes .................. 106 Opening/closing ............................ 106 Problem (malfunction) ................... 110 Resetting ....................................... 108 Sidebag ................................................ 53 Sliding sunroof Opening/closing ............................ 111 Rain closing feature ....................... 112 Resetting ....................................... 112 see Panorama sliding sunroof Snow chains ...................................... 431 Sockets Centre console .............................. 381 General notes ................................ 381 Rear compartment ......................... 382 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Spectacles compartment ................. 369 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 312 Digital ............................................ 299 In the Instrument cluster ................. 34 Segments ...................................... 293 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 312 see Instrument cluster SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 221 Display message ............................ 341 Function/notes ............................. 219 Important safety notes .................. 219 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 219 Permanent ..................................... 221 Selecting ........................................ 220 Storing the current speed .............. 220 19 20 Index Variable ......................................... 219 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Warning lamp ................................. 282 Start/Stop button Starting the engine ........................ 184 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 183 Stationary vehicle ............................. 278 STEER CONTROL .................................. 85 Steering Warning lamps ............................... 365 Steering (display message) .............. 349 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message ............................ 342 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 126 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 125 Button overview ............................... 36 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 294 Cleaning ......................................... 403 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 126 Gearshift paddles ........................... 198 Important safety notes .................. 125 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 131 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 198 Stowage areas ................................... 368 Stowage compartment Map pockets .................................. 370 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 370 Centre console .............................. 369 Cup holder ..................................... 376 Door ............................................... 370 Glove compartment ....................... 369 Important safety information ......... 368 Rear ............................................... 370 Spectacles compartment ............... 369 Stowage net ....................................... 370 Stowage space Stowage net ................................... 370 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... Summer tyres In winter ........................................ Sun blind Rear side windows ......................... Sun visor ............................................ Suspension tuning AIRMATIC ...................................... Switching the auxiliary heating/ ventilation On/off ........................................... 375 430 378 378 235 173 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ 330 see Lights Technical data Capacities ...................................... 468 Emergency spare wheel ................. 464 Information .................................... 466 Trailer loads ................................... 478 Tyres/wheels ................................. 444 Vehicle data ................................... 476 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 305 Display message ............................ 349 Introduction ................................... 304 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 304 Number from the phone book ........ 305 Redialling ....................................... 306 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 305 Telephone compartment ................ 370 Temperature Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) .......................................... 293 Coolant (display in the on-board computer) ...................................... 307 Outside temperature ...................... 293 Setting (climate control) ................ 160 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 216 Through-loading feature ................... 371 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 409 Top Tether ............................................ 65 Total distance recorder .................... 298 Index Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 86 Deactivating ..................................... 86 Function ........................................... 86 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 424 Important safety notes .................. 420 Towing Important safety notes .................. 420 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 423 With the rear axle raised ................ 422 Towing a trailer Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 266 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 269 Active Parking Assist ..................... 239 Axle load, permissible .................... 480 Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps ............................................. 287 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 82 General notes ................................ 284 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 185 Trailer tow hitch display message .. 347 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 422 Removing the towing eye ............... 422 With both axles on the ground ....... 422 Towing eye ......................................... 407 Traffic Sign Assist Activating ....................................... 257 Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 308 Display message ............................ 340 Function/notes ............................. 256 Important safety notes .................. 257 Instrument cluster display ............. 257 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 287 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 261 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 402 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 286 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 286 Driving tips .................................... 284 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 286 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 285 Important safety notes .................. 283 Lights display message .................. Mounting dimensions .................... Parktronic ...................................... Power supply ................................. Problem (fault) ............................... Trailer loads ................................... Transfer case ..................................... Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transmission position display ......... Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... Transporting the vehicle .................. Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. Trip meter Calling up ....................................... Resetting (on-board computer) ...... Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... Changing bulbs (rear) .................... Switching on/off ........................... TV Operating (on-board computer) ..... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ 329 477 236 287 289 478 200 195 195 423 403 299 298 299 144 144 137 304 466 466 466 433 343 433 411 411 432 436 436 437 434 21 22 Index Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. MOExtended tyres ......................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Summer tyres in winter ................. Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... Wheel and tyre combinations ........ see Flat tyre 433 433 434 436 435 364 435 437 429 438 343 428 430 438 429 438 430 444 429 445 U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 98 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 97 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 378 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 28 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 345 Electronics ..................................... 466 Equipment ....................................... 25 Implied warranty .............................. 28 Individual settings .......................... 307 Leaving parked up ......................... 211 Locking (in an emergency) ............. 100 Locking (key) ................................... 91 Lowering ........................................ 443 Operating safety .............................. 25 Pulling away ................................... 184 Raising ........................................... 439 Registration ..................................... 28 Securing from rolling away ............ 439 Towing away .................................. 420 Transporting .................................. 423 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 98 Unlocking (key) ................................ 91 Vehicle data ................................... 476 Vehicle data Boot load (maximum) ..................... 476 Roof load (maximum) ..................... 476 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 476 Vehicle emergency locking .............. 100 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 468 Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... 234 Display message ............................ 337 Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle tool kit .................................. 407 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 303 VIN ...................................................... 468 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 355 Brakes ........................................... 353 Distance warning signal ................. 363 ESP® .............................................. 357 ESP® OFF ....................................... 358 Hybrid system ................................ 362 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 216 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 223 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 219 Overview .......................................... 35 Parking brake ................................ 359 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 46 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) ............................................... 362 Reserve fuel ................................... 360 Seat belt ........................................ 351 SRS ................................................ 282 Steering ......................................... 365 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 364 Warning triangle ................................ 406 Index Warnings Stickers ........................................... 42 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 349 Wheel and tyre combinations see Tyres Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 443 Wheel chock ...................................... 439 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 437 Changing/replacing ....................... 438 Checking ........................................ 429 Cleaning ......................................... 399 Emergency spare wheel ................. 461 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 442 Fitting a wheel ............................... 438 Important safety notes .................. 428 Removing a wheel .......................... 442 Storing ........................................... 438 Tightening torque ........................... 443 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 444 Windowbag Display message ............................ 326 Operation ......................................... 53 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 399 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 163 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Notes ............................................. 476 Topping up ..................................... 394 Windscreen wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 148 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 145 Switching on/off ........................... 145 Winter operation Important safety notes .................. 430 Radiator cover ............................... 392 Slippery road surfaces ................... 215 Snow chains .................................. 431 Summer tyres ................................ 430 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. 313 M+S tyres ...................................... 430 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Replacing (windscreen) .................. Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 400 145 145 146 403 23 24 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch H Environmental note Have defective high-voltage batteries disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. You can return your vehicle to these plants free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conservation of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. Introduction ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 468). Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs car- Z 25 26 Introduction ried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis Ra In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and an electric motor. The voltage supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not touch any high-voltage components after an accident and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. The components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are marked with yellow Introduction warning stickers. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange. Vehicles with an electric motor generate significantly less noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, in certain situations your vehicle may not be heard by other road users. This can happen, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Z 27 28 Introduction Rwork on electronic components on the hybrid system Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rwork as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual technical data in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle dent Roptimise vehicle functions Introduction The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Rservice Raccident reports to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. Rdamage Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource Z 29 30 31 Cockpit ................................................. 32 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 36 Centre console .................................... 37 Overhead control panel ...................... 39 Door control panel .............................. 40 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 34 32 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 198 ; Combination switch 137 = Horn ? Instrument cluster A DIRECT SELECT lever 193 B Climate control systems 150 C Overhead control panel 39 D Control panel for COMAND Online and vehicle functions 37 34 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 181 181 F Adjusts the steering wheel 125 G Cruise control lever 216 Function Page H Electric parking brake I Diagnostics connection J Opens the bonnet 391 K Light switch 134 L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist Deactivating PARKTRONIC Switching on 360° camera Switching on the head-up display Vehicles without a driver assistance system: map/ coin holder 209 27 230 266 236 249 295 33 At a glance Cockpit Function Page Function Page : Overhead control panel 39 E Light switch 134 ; Climate control systems 150 F Opens the bonnet 391 = Combination switch 137 G Diagnostics connection ? Instrument cluster 34 H Electric parking brake 209 A Horn I B DIRECT SELECT lever Ignition lock Start/Stop button 181 181 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles J Adjusts the steering wheel 125 K Cruise control lever 216 L Control panel for COMAND Online and vehicle functions D Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist Deactivating PARKTRONIC Switching on 360° camera Switching on the head-up display Vehicles without a driver assistance systems: map/ coin holder 193 198 230 266 236 249 295 27 37 34 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function : Speedometer ; Multifunction display Function Page 295 i Information on the energy flow display and power display for electric motors in hybrid vehicles can be found in the "Hybrid drive" section (Y page 272). Page = Rev counter 293 ? Coolant temperature gauge 293 A Fuel gauge Instrument cluster 35 At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page Function Page : å ESP® OFF 357 I J Brakes (yellow) ; ÷ ESP® 357 J 6 Restraint system = · Distance warning 363 K ü Seat belt 351 ? Ð Power steering 365 L A #! Turn signals 137 K Main-beam headlamps 137 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) M 359 L Dipped-beam headlamps 135 C ! ABS 355 N 8 Reserve fuel 360 D ; Engine diagnostics 360 O E % Diesel engine: preglow T Side lamps, licence plate and instrument cluster lighting 136 183 P ! Electric parking brake (red) N This lamp has no function 359 Q R Rear foglamp 135 G J Brakes (red) 353 R h Tyre pressure monitor 364 H ? Coolant 360 F i Information on warning and indicator lamps in hybrid vehicles can be found in the "Hybrid drive" section (Y page 272). 353 44 36 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio 20/COMAND Online display; see the separate operating instructions = ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute ó Switches on LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions Page 295 304 Function ? ò Calls up a main menu 9: Selects a menu/submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back ñ Switches off LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions Page 294 294 314 294 Centre console 37 Centre console Function At a glance Centre console, upper section Page : Climate control systems 150 ; £ Hazard warning lamps 137 = Vehicle functions/system settings button (see the separate operating instructions) ? Telephone button (see the separate operating instructions) A PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp ATA indicator lamp 46 85 Function B Analogue clock C Media button (see the separate operating instructions) D Radio button (see the separate operating instructions) E Navigation button (see the separate operating instructions) F þ Inserts/ejects a CD/DVD (see the separate operating instructions) Page 38 Centre console At a glance Centre console, lower section i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Function : Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Cup holders ; Adjusts/mutes the volume (see the separate operating instructions) = Switches audio/COMAND Online on/off (see the separate operating instructions) ? è ECO start/stop function A Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions) Function Page Page B Stowage compartment 368 368 379 380 381 376 C u Rear window roller sunblind 379 D É Sets the vehicle level 234 E AGILITY SELECT switch 197 F Back button (see the separate operating instructions) G Audio 20/COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions) H g Switches to the favourites button (see the separate operating instructions) 186 Overhead control panel 39 At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 141 G SOS button (Mercedes-Benz emergency call system) 384 ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 141 A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 141 B p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 140 = 140 Function Page C ï MB Info call button (Mercedes-Benz Contact) 385 D Spectacles compartment 369 E 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof Opens/closes the roller sunblinds 112 113 F Rear-view mirror 127 G F Breakdown assistance call button (Mercedes-Benz Contact) 385 40 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function : Page Function E r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 130 ; Adjusts the seats electrically 121 = c Seat heating 123 ? s Seat ventilation 124 A Opens the door 97 B % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle 97 C W Opens/closes the rear left side window 106 D W Opens/closes the left side window 106 Page 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 128 F W Opens/closes the right side window 106 G W Opens/closes the rear right side window 106 H n Override feature for the controls in the rear compartment I p Opens/closes the boot lid 73 104 41 Useful information .............................. 42 Hybrid vehicles ................................... 42 Panic alarm .......................................... 44 Children in the vehicle ........................ 63 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 74 Driving safety systems ....................... 74 Protection against theft ..................... 85 Safety Occupant safety .................................. 44 42 Hybrid vehicles Useful information Safety i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. When towing a vehicle after an accident, be sure to observe the following sections: RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 423) RTowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised (Y page 422) the vehicle with both axles on the ground (Y page 422) Read the safety instructions on towing and tow-starting (Y page 420). RTowing i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Hybrid vehicles General notes Hybrid technology combines a fuel-efficient internal combustion engine with a powerful electric motor. Important safety notes Danger of electric shock G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not touch any high-voltage components after an accident and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. All components of the hybrid system are marked with yellow warning stickers that warn you of the danger of high voltage. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in colour. The ignition must be switched off when carrying out general tasks, such as changing bulbs or checking the coolant level. Automatic deactivation of the hybrid system G DANGER If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for example. In addition, the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may not be deactivated as intended in the event of an accident. Touching damaged components of the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system could result in an electric shock. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Hybrid vehicles If components of the restraint system are activated during an accident, the hybrid system is automatically deactivated. The hybrid system is not activated when the vehicle is started if: Ra short circuit is detected in the hybrid sys- tem. hybrid system electrical connection is disconnected. This ensures that you do not come into contact with high voltage. Ra Get assistance from others if necessary. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. There is therefore a risk of being locked out if the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a dynamometer. X Switch the ignition off. X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P. Apply the electric parking brake (Y page 209). Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 439). X To use the high-voltage switch-off device: open the bonnet. Manual deactivation of the hybrid system The hybrid system can be deactivated manually using the high voltage switch-off device. ! To prevent damage to the hybrid system please observe the following instructions: Ronly deactivate the hybrid system manually in the following situations. Rwork on the hybrid system may only be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, even when it has been deactivated manually. Rif the 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up after an accident. Rif the vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and the restraint system components were not activated. Rif the vehicle is badly damaged and has to be towed or transported. X If possible, move the vehicle out of the danger zone: shift the automatic transmission into position N. X Release the electric parking brake. X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park it safely. Press release clip : in the direction of the arrow and pull it out. X Pull high voltage switch-off device ; apart until it engages in the stop position. X High-voltage battery G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery could exceed a critical value. In this case, flammable gas escapes through a vent valve in the vehicle's underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger area immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. Z Safety Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. After an accident, immediately switch the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition lock. 43 Occupant safety 44 Safety G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. enables the recovery of kinetic energy (recuperation). For further information on the RBS system (Y page 269). Panic alarm ! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehicle standing idle for lengthy periods can damage the high-voltage battery. If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods, run it for a few minutes once every six weeks to charge up the high-voltage battery. During the charging process, switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. the automatic climate control or the seat heating. Information on charging the high-voltage battery (Y page 416). Engine compartment Before opening the bonnet: Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the automatic transmission to park position P. X Switch the ignition off. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Observe the warning notes on the risk of electric shock (Y page 42). X Observe the warning notes about the bonnet (Y page 391). X X RBS driving safety system (Recuperative Brake System) RBS supports you when braking with an electronically-controlled brake boost mode and To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Press the Start/Stop button. The key must be in the vehicle. X The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. Occupant safety Rseat belt system Rairbags Rchild restraint system Rchild seat securing system The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only offer protection if all vehicle occupants always: Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened (Y page 48) Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted properly (Y page 119) As the driver, you must also make sure that the steering wheel is also adjusted properly. Observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (Y page 118). In addition, you must make sure that the airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 51). An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat belt and, as an additional safety device, increases protection for vehicle occupants in applicable accident situations. The airbags are not deployed, for example, in the event of an accident in which sufficient protection is offered by the seat belt. In addition, only those airbags, which in the applicable accident situations offer additional protection, are deployed in the event of an accident. However, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on how the restraint system operates can be found under "Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags" (Y page 60). See "Children in the vehicle" for further information on children travelling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems (Y page 63). Important safety notes G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorised Mercedes-Benz Centre. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running All vehicles, except hybrid vehicles: G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for example. Z Safety The restraint system includes the: 45 Safety 46 Occupant safety There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Hybrid vehicles: G DANGER If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for example. In addition, the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may not be deactivated as intended in the event of an accident. Touching damaged components of the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system could result in an electric shock. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. After an accident, immediately switch the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition lock. PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the case of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a rearward-facing child restraint system: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Always observe the information on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 54) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 63). RChildren in a forward-facing child restraint system: depending on the installed child restraint system, the age and size of the child the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. Therefore, always observe the information on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 54) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 63). RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled. Depending on the build of the person on the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may light up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger seat should not be used. Always observe the information on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 54) as well Occupant safety Seat belts Introduction A correctly fastened seatbelt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of a collision or if the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown from the vehicle. Additionally, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. The seat belt system consists of: Rseat belts tensioners for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Rbelt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled too quickly or suddenly from the belt outlet, the inertia reel will lock. The belt strap cannot be pulled out further. In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens the belt to pull it close to the body. It does not pull the vehicle occupants back in the direction of the seat backrest. The belt tensioner cannot compensate for the seat position being incorrect or for a seat belt being routed or worn incorrectly. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This reduces the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. Rbelt ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. Important safety notes G WARNING The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always make sure that all vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belt properly and are seated correctly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without a suitable, additional restraint system. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system. Z Safety as on "Seat belts" (Y page 47) and "Airbags" (Y page 51). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. 47 48 Occupant safety If a child younger than 12 years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Safety Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 54) Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" in this Owner's Manual (Y page 63) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify safety belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. Any such modifications could invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. Correct seat belt use Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 47). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can forces which occur be distributed across the surface of the seat belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm. If possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes across your lap as tightly and as low down as possible. The lap must always be routed across your hip joints and never across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, press the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 368). automatically; see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 47) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 48). If the centre rear seat belt is being used, also observe the information about the seat belt for the centre rear seat (Y page 49). The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the centre of the shoulder. Adjust the belt sash guide if necessary. To raise: slide the belt guide upwards. The belt guide will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt guide release : and slide the belt guide downwards. X Let go of belt guide release : in the desired position and make sure that the belt guide engages. X Seat belt for the centre rear seat Adjust the seat (Y page 118). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened X If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear centre seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat Z 49 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety 50 Safety mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. separate COMAND Online or Audio 20 operating instructions. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all vehicle occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. A warning tone may also sound. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone switches off as soon as the driver and co-driver have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see the "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" section (Y page 351). Rear seat belt status indicator X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards belt outlet =. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using COMAND Online or Audio 20. Information on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual or in the The rear seat belt status indicator is only available for certain countries. For approximately 30 seconds, the rear seat belt status indicator informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. The rear seat belt status indicator appears if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and you pull away again. If a rear seat passenger unfastens their seat belt when travelling at a speed above 25 km/h, a short warning tone also sounds. You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 314). Airbags Introduction The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An airbag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. It is not a replacement for the seat belt. The airbag offers additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other (Y page 60). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to completely rule out a risk of injury caused by an airbag due to the speed at which the airbag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the airbags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The centre of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under 12 years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. ROnly secure a child to the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled, and only then in a rearwardfacing child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled (Y page 46). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 54) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 63) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Z 51 Safety Occupant safety 52 Occupant safety Safety Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. When deployed on the front seats, the front airbags offer additional protection for the head and thorax. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the frontpassenger front airbag (Y page 46). Front-passenger front airbag ; will only deploy if: Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 54). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up (Y page 54) Rthe restraint system predicts a high severity of an accident Driver's kneebag Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the sidebag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's kneebag is triggered together with the front airbag. The driver's kneebag on the driver's seat offers additional protection for the thighs, knee and lower leg. Sidebags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent the deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz. Rarms In the event of a side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: the sidebag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions: Ran occupant is detected on the frontpassenger seat or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Windowbags Windowbags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the windowbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. Z 53 Safety Occupant safety Safety 54 Occupant safety In the event of a side impact, the windowbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a windowbag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 60). Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Introduction In order to recognise a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system categorises the person in the frontpassenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front airbag is either enabled or disabled. If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted to the frontpassenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up after the system self-test and remain lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. The system does not disable: Rthe sidebag windowbag Rthe seat belt tensioner Make sure that your vehicle is equipped with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 66). If this is not the case, always fit the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat (Y page 68). If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The Rthe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then is the correct function of the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system guaranteed. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 68) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Operation of automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out a self-diagnosis. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the case of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an airbag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 328). When the frontpassenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front airbag both before and during the journey. If there is no child restraint system fitted to the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system may be influenced, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion The front-passenger front airbag may be disabled by mistake as a result of these or similar actions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up permanently. The front-passenger front airbag does not then deploy during an accident. into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always make sure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and that the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co-driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 59). G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come Z 55 Safety Occupant safety 56 Occupant safety Safety G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system detects that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system selftest and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. But in the case of a child in a rearwardfacing child restraint, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp can light up after the system self-test and remain lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's build. It is recommended that you fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a forward-facing child restraint system, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's build. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 66) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 68). Alternatively, you can fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person with a small build can sit on a rear seat. - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person with a smaller build should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 63). If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a MercedesBenz Service Centre. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front airbag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. This could result in the front-passenger front airbag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must Z 57 Safety Occupant safety Safety 58 Occupant safety always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardsfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the rear reclining seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp display the status of the frontpassenger front airbag (Y page 54). Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 59). Occupant safety 59 Problems with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 57). Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator incorrect. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the perremains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54). though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occufront-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation person with a build corsystem checked as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Serresponding to that of an vice Centre. adult. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint system. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion. X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. Rempty X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the Roccupied with a rearseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the frontward-facing child passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and restraint system the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. It is recommended that you fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Safety Problem 60 Occupant safety Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags Safety Important safety notes G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause shortterm breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the seat belt tensioners in the event of a head-on or rear collision. A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 45) Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat The seat belt tensioners in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a high severity of an accident, in certain headon collisions, additional components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each another: Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt On vehicles with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system: depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. The frontpassenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 46). Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of Rwindowbag, injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if the second deployment stage is activated within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold for the seat belt tensioners and airbags is determined based on the evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment process should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle overturns, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. If the system determines that, in this situation, triggering can offer additional protection, the seat belt tensioners are also triggered. RSidebags on the side on which an impact occurs, independent from the seat belt tensioner and seat belt usage Vehicles with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system: the sidebag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions: - an occupant is detected on the frontpassenger seat or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindowbag on the side on which an impact occurs, independent of seat belt usage and regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied RWindowbags on the driver's and frontpassenger side in certain situations if the vehicle overturns and if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision impact Roverturn Rside Z 61 Safety Occupant safety 62 Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Safety Introduction PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRESAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. The panorama sliding sunroof is completely closed. Rvehicles with the memory function for the front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You will find information on the convenience function under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50). PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Introduction PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rearend collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene: Rif the vehicle is reversing the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear-end collision PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform braking actions while the vehicle is in motion or when Parking Guidance is active. Rwhen Children in the vehicle PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: RIf the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. RIf the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent: - the rear hazard warning lamps are activated and flash at a higher frequency. - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is cancelled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rvehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off Rthe Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: automatic emergency call Rvehicles with the hybrid drive system: the hybrid system is deactivated Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than 12 years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Ralways pay attention to the instructions and safety notes on the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 54) G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Z Safety Function 63 64 Children in the vehicle Safety When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 47) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (Y page 48). Child restraint system Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 68). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system recommended by Mercedes-Benz (Y page 71). G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 368). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a Children in the vehicle Securing systems for the child restraint system are: Rthe seat belt system ISOFIX securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 66). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX securing rings. ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. Rthe i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ISOFIX child seat securing system G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 68). : ISOFIX securing rings Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the rear seat armrest so that ISOFIX securing rings : for the ISOFIX child restraint system are accessible. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. ISOFIX securing rings : for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. Secure child restraint systems without an ISOFIX child seat securing system using the seat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 68). Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child Z Safety load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. 65 66 Children in the vehicle restraint system is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Safety Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. Top Tether anchorages Top Tether anchorage points = are fitted in the rear compartment behind the outer head restraints on the parcel shelf. Move head restraint : upwards. Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly (Y page 121). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X X Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on "Automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 54). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 46). Vehicles without the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system Ra child restraint system that is not detected by the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Rthe unintentional disabling of the frontpassenger front airbag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Please observe the warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor, see the illustration. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co-driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not equipped with the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. In this case, always fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat (Y page 68). Observe the following information under "Rearward-facing child restraint system" and "Forward-facing child restraint system" as well as information on the suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 68). Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 46) is the front-passenger front airbag disabled. Z 67 Safety Children in the vehicle 68 Children in the vehicle Safety Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 68) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. of the child restraint system is not possible due to possible contact with the roof. "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal". Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a forwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 68) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Introduction Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle. For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use is restricted. The maximum size setting Example: approval label on the child restraint system "Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or IUF according to the tables "Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" or "Suitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system". Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "Semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat – if it is absolutely necessary to secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: X Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 66). There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt Children in the vehicle Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a forward-facing child restraint system from category I, you must, where possible, dismantle the head restraint of the respective seat (Y page 122). The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 64) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system, you must immediately replace the head restraint (Y page 121). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the table "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 71). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. (▲) The vehicle is equipped with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. (♦) Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. Front-passenger seat Weight categories The frontpassenger front airbag is enabled. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. (▲) Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Category II: U, L 15 to 25 kg U, L Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L Z Safety guide on the child restraint system (Y page 68). X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. X Move the backrest to an almost vertical position. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Move the seat cushion angle to the highest, most vertical position. 69 70 Children in the vehicle Safety Rear seats Legend for the table: Weight categories Left, right Centre Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L U (♦), L (♦) Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L U (♦), L (♦) Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L U (♦), L (♦) Category II: U, L 15 to 25 kg X Category III: 22 to 36 kg X U, L Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a forward-facing child restraint system from category I, you must, where possible, dismantle the head restraint of the respective seat (Y page 122). The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 64) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system, you must immediately replace the head restraint (Y page 121). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 71). The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. (♦) If you are using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position and the front-seat backrest to an upright position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system. Carry-cot weight category Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X Weight category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right E ISO/R1 IL Children in the vehicle Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight category 0: up to 10 kg; up to approximately 6 months Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right E ISO/R1 IL Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer D ISO/R2 IL Type C ISO/R3 IL (♦) BABY SAFE plus BABY SAFE plus II Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 04 301146 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 10 00 970 20 00 Colour code: Colour code: 9H95 9H95 Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg approximately 9 months to 4 years Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL (♦) B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Recommended child restraint systems General notes Always observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 66) and on "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 68). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg; up to approximately 15 months Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type BABY SAFE plus BABY SAFE plus II Approval number (E1 ...) 03 30114 6 04 30114 6 04 301146 Order 970 10 00 970 20 00 number Colour Colour code: (A 000 ...) code: 9H95 9H95 Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg; approximately 9 months to 4 years Manufacturer Britax Römer Type DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 16 00 Colour code: 9H95 Z Safety Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months 71 72 Children in the vehicle Safety Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg; approximately 4 to 12 years Type BABY SAFE plus – Manufacturer Britax Römer Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 – Type KIDFIX Order number – Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301198 B6 6 86 8224 Colour code: 9H95 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 19 00 Colour code: 9H95 Before fitting the KIDFIX child restraint system in the vehicle, always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. These will also include notes on fixing options. Recommended "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems Carry-cot weight category Category I: 9 to 18 kg Size categories D, C, B, A Manufacturer – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Size categories F, G Type DUO plus Manufacturer – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number (A 000 ...) Order number – 970 16 00 Colour code: 9H95 Child-proof locks Category 0: up to 10 kg Size category E Manufacturer – Type – Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Important safety notes G WARNING If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Category 0+: up to 13 kg Size categories E D, C Manufacturer Britax Römer – Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example There is a risk of an accident and injury. Children in the vehicle Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Child-proof locks for the rear doors Safety Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: Rthe Rthe rear doors (Y page 73) rear side windows (Y page 73) G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. 73 X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the drivZ 74 Driving safety systems Safety er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 74) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 75) RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist) (Y page 75) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 77) RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 80) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 80) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 82) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 82) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 82) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 85) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. (Y page 428). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. RABS ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Driving safety systems Important safety notes Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 355) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 315). ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist) General notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. tion (Y page 74). Braking X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The Z Safety tion (Y page 74). 75 76 Driving safety systems brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. Safety i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 76). BAS PLUS can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Rinterference Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensor system detection range Detection by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer detects a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windscreen, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle and PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUS is carried out at the last possible moment. RBAS When driving at a speed above 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 7 km/h and 250 km/h. At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are recognised by them i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again if: Ryou release the brake pedal is no longer a risk of collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou activate kickdown Rthere COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General notes COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous emergency braking function and adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Please observe the information in the section on running-in the vehicle (Y page 180). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rsnow Distance warning function Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 74). Z 77 Safety Driving safety systems 78 Driving safety systems G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Safety Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. Rnot Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 308). If the distance warning function is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. The distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: Rof approximately 30 km/h or more, if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insuffi- cient. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rof approximately 7 km/h or more, if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and the distance warning function detects a risk of a collision, the system will alert you both visually and acoustically. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R7 - 105 km/h for moving objects R7 - 50 km/h for stationary objects Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R7 - 200 km/h for moving objects - 50 km/h for stationary objects If the autonomous braking function demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. R7 Adaptive Brake Assist i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 7 km/h. It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto tions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal is no longer any danger of a collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Up to a speed of approximately 250 km/h, adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. Rthere Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condiZ 79 Safety Driving safety systems 80 Driving safety systems Adaptive brake lamps The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation: Safety Rby flashing brake lamps activating the hazard warning lamps If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 137). Rby ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is a component of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you test the parking brake using a brake dynamometer, switch the ignition off. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 422). ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and: Rthe vehicle is moving ECO start/stop function is activated If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 357) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 315). Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Rthe Driving safety systems General notes If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated is deactivated G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Rin Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer. X To deactivate: (Y page 307). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: (Y page 307). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability driven wheels can spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Rthe Z Safety Characteristics of ESP® 81 82 Driving safety systems Safety ESP® trailer stabilisation General notes If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/ trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of approximately 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 355) as well as display messages (Y page 318). Crosswind Assist General notes Strong crosswind gusts can impair the roadholding of your vehicle when driving straight ahead. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments. Depending on the direction and intensity of the side wind, ESP® is activated automatically. ESP intervenes with stabilising braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 80 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 232) and hill start assist (Y page 185). PRE-SAFE® Brake General notes i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 74). Driving safety systems Important safety notes In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. The PRE-SAFE® Brake function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 7 km/h and 200 km/h At a speed of up to approximately 70 km/h, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle G WARNING G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: cle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Z Safety PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 83). PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. 83 84 Driving safety systems Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Safety Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Detection by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer detects a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windscreen, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 309). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. This function will issue a warning if: Rat a speed of around 30 km/h or more, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for several seconds. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or higher, you very quickly approach a vehicle in front or a pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRESAFE®) are activated. If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further kickdown Rreleasing the brake pedal Ractivating Protection against theft Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle is no longer a risk of collision Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle Rthere STEER CONTROL General notes STEER CONTROL is only available in vehicles without 4MATIC. STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering support is provided in particular if: To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO startfunction or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle starts to skid Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning steering is faulty If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. Rthe To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Protection against theft A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Immobiliser Ra The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet Rthe Z Safety The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: 85 Protection against theft 86 Safety X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. or Priming Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. Make sure that: doors are closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the tow-away protection primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 60 seconds. X X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. X Rthe Switching off X or X i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Assistance Centre. This is done by means of a text message or a data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system Rthe Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system has been activated properly Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Insert the key into the ignition lock. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating You can deactivate the tow-away protection using COMAND Online or Audio 20. You can find information about deactivating the towaway protection in the separate COMAND Online or Audio 20 operating instructions. Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Priming X Make sure that: Protection against theft side windows are closed sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. 87 Rthe Safety Rthe Switching off X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The key must be in the vehicle. The interior motion sensor is automatically deactivated. Deactivating You can deactivate the interior motion sensor using COMAND Online or Audio 20. You can find information about deactivating the interior motion sensor in the separate COMAND Online or Audio 20 operating instructions. Z 88 89 Useful information .............................. 90 Key ........................................................ 90 Doors .................................................... 96 Boot .................................................... 101 Side windows .................................... 106 Opening and closing Sliding sunroof .................................. 110 90 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Key Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor . The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). All countries: G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the key on the parcel shelf or in the boot. Otherwise, the key may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine driving Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Rwhilst Key functions When the locator lighting is activated via COMAND Online or Audio 20, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control (see the separate operating instructions). X To open the boot lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold button ; until the boot lid opens. X To open the boot lid automatically from outside the vehicle: if the key is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle: press the F button on the key. You can release the button as soon as the boot lid starts to close. KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in the vehicle. : & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens/closes the boot lid = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press button =. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again against theft is reactivated. Rprotection X To lock centrally: press button :. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated via COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Locking and unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhilst driving Z 91 Opening and closing Key Key 92 the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Opening and closing Rwhen KEYLESS-GO start function Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in the vehicle. Changing the settings of the locking system To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. For further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 107). X To unlock the boot lid: pull the boot lid handle. X Deactivating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a longer period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-GO. The key will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the key twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the key lights up twice briefly and KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To activate: press any button on the key or insert the key into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 94). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six sec- Key Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. Removing the emergency key element X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 98) the boot (Y page 105) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 100) Runlocking Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages and Z Opening and closing onds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 94). 93 Key 94 Opening and closing Checking the battery Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 94). If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: opens. When doing so, do not hold battery compartment cover : shut. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X X i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 93). X Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. Insert emergency key element ; into the key. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Key 95 Problems with the key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X The key is faulty. Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. or unlock the vehicle X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91). using KEYLESS-GO. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the key battery (Y page 94) and replace it if necessary (Y page 94). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Opening and closing You can no longer lock The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the key battery (Y page 94) and replace it if necessary using the key. (Y page 94). Opening and closing 96 Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. X The on-board voltage is too low. Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 416). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 418). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. Stop button. The key is in the vehicle. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the key battery (Y page 94) and replace it if necessary (Y page 94). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. X You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 86). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). All countries: G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease proof locks (Y page 73). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). For all countries except the United Kingdom: You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 73). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368). Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor . The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child- X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door. Z 97 Opening and closing Doors Doors 98 To unlock: press button :. X To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. Opening and closing X This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. For all countries except the United Kingdom: The doors can be opened from the inside. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the childproof locks (Y page 73). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESSGO, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 86). It is then possible to operate the doors as follows. The doors can be opened from the inside. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 73). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked. Automatic locking feature To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. Therefore, you could be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. Rthe i You can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking function via COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 93). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Doors Insert the tip of the emergency key element into the slit on the cover of the driver's door lock and turn it until the cover is released. Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks. Insert the emergency key element into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. X Opening and closing X X On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver's door with the thicker end towards the front of the vehicle and press to secure. Then make sure that the slit of the cover is horizontal. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: 99 Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks. X On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 93). X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so. All vehicles: If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). Z Doors 100 Opening and closing Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 97). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 93). Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver's door with the thicker end towards the front of the vehicle and press to secure. Then make sure that the slit of the cover is horizontal. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Insert the tip of the emergency key element into the slit on the cover of the driver's door lock and turn it until the cover is released. Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob drops down and the driver's door is locked. Insert the emergency key element into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. X X On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob drops down and the driver's door is locked. X On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. Boot All vehicles: If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. Boot Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. Never drive with the boot lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions on the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 476). i You can limit the opening angle of the boot lid in COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368). Obstacle detection with boot lid reversing feature Vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid is equipped with automatic obstacle detection with reversing function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the boot lid when automatically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts the boot lid when automatically closing, the boot lid opens again automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the boot lid. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rpress the F button on the key, or the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the boot lid, or Rpull the boot lid handle Rpress Z Opening and closing Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 93). X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so. X 101 Boot 102 Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Opening and closing Opening/closing from the outside Opening Opening/closing automatically from the outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the closing or locking button on the boot lid. RPull the boot lid handle. RPress X Press the F button on the key. or X Pull handle :. The boot lid opens. Closing Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 476). Opening Pull the boot lid down using recess : and push it closed. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91). X You can open the boot lid automatically using the key or the handle in the boot lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. or X If the boot is unlocked, pull the boot lid handle and release it again immediately. Boot Closing 103 ! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the boot lid opening unintentionally: Rusing a car wash a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away from the vehicle. General notes X Press closing button : on the boot lid. Vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door is closed you can simultaneously close the boot lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the boot lid. If KEYLESS-GO detects a key outside the vehicle, the boot lid closes and the vehicle is locked. If KEYLESS-GO detects a key in the boot, the boot lid opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second key outside the vehicle, the boot lid remains closed. With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the boot lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. HANDS-FREE ACCESS Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make a leg movement within the detection range of sensors. RAlways ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 30 cm away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Oth- Z Opening and closing Rusing Boot Opening and closing 104 erwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDSFREE ACCESS could be triggered. The boot lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - set down or lift up an object behind the vehicle - polish the rear of the vehicle Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in such situations. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the boot. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. RUsing HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. Operation To stop the opening or closing procedure: Rmove your foot in sensor detection range : under the bumper, or Rpull the handle on the outside of the boot lid or Rpress the closing button in the boot lid or Rpress the F button on the key If the boot lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the boot lid will open If the boot lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the boot lid will close Opening/closing automatically from the inside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: X X To open/close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your leg. You will hear a warning tone while the boot lid is opening or closing. If the boot lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then kick under the bumper once again. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the boot lid does not open or close. Repeat the kicking movement more quickly if this occurs. RPress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the closing or locking button on the boot lid. RPull the boot lid handle. RPress Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Boot 105 ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. Opening and closing Activating the function to lock the boot separately: Close the boot lid. Open the glove compartment. X Push the switch to position :. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the boot remains locked. i You can also lock the glove compartment (Y page 369). Deactivating the function to lock the boot separately: X X You can open and close the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is completely closed. Locking the boot separately The separate boot locking function is only available in certain countries. You can lock the boot separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X X Open the glove compartment. Push the switch to position ;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the boot will also be unlocked. Unlocking the boot (emergency key element) ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key, KEYLESS-GO or HANDS-FREE ACCESS, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 93). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. Z Opening and closing The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 476). Side windows Opening and closing 106 G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 93). X When you lock the vehicle (Y page 100), the boot is also locked. Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from travelling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. Side windows 107 Convenience opening feature : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again. X If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again. You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 73). i Information on opening and closing the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows (Y page 378). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. If the key is in the immediate vicinity to the vehicle, the convenience opening function is available. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat Ropen Convenience opening feature Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama sliding sunroof is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is oper- Z Opening and closing General notes Side windows 108 Opening and closing ating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: if the key is in the immediate vicinity to the vehicle, the convenience closing function is available. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rclose Rthe side windows (Y page 106) Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 111) Using the key Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X X X Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: press and hold the & button until the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof close. To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the key and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 1 m. Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. X Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 106). X Hold the switch for an additional second. Side windows 109 If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 106). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Opening and closing X Z 110 Sliding sunroof Problems with the side windows Opening and closing G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sunroof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Sliding sunroof it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Only for vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man- ually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing Sliding sunroof reversing feature Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sunroof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. X If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open Z Opening and closing ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if 111 112 Sliding sunroof Opening and closing or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or frontpassenger door is opened. Rain-closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: it starts to rain. extreme outside temperatures. Rafter six hours. Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply. The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The sliding sunroof does not close if: Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 111). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Operating the panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing Rif Rat Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor, e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge. Rit Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not operate smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 111). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama sliding sunroof can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. If the panorama sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the panorama sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains Sliding sunroof Rain-closing feature when the engine is switched off If the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or if it is removed, the panorama sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain. Rat extreme outside temperatures. Rafter six hours. Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply. The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor. If the vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered. Rit Rain-closing feature when driving The raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe Rthe road speed and intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the 3 switch in direction :. The "Rain-closing feature when driving" function is deactivated, until you: Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direction or Rturn the key to another position in the ignition lock (Y page 181). Operating the panorama sliding sunroof roller sunblinds Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblind parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening/closing process is stopped. Rduring The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The front roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the sliding sunroof is closed. Roller sunblinds reversing feature The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the roller blind during the closing process, the roller blind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid, not a substitute for your attention when closing the roller sunblind. Z Opening and closing active for five minutes or until you open a front door. The panorama sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof carrier is fitted. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the panorama sliding sunroof. If a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz makes contact with the panorama sliding sunroof, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. 113 114 Sliding sunroof Opening and closing G WARNING The reversing feature especially does not react to soft, light and thin objects, such as small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone is trapped: If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Opening and closing roller sunblinds Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close You can only close the roller sunblinds when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press the 3 switch in direction :. Both roller sunblinds open, then the sliding roof is raised. X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. The sunblinds open X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. The roller sunblinds close when the panorama sliding roof is closed. Reset the panorama sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind if the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds does not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch in the direction of arrow : repeatedly until the front roller sunblind is closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 112) and the front roller sunblind (Y page 114) can be fully opened again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Sliding sunroof 115 Problems with the sliding sunroof If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process The closing process is stopped. Rpress Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof or If the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed panorama sliding sun- during closing and reopens again slightly: roof cannot be closed X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to and you cannot see the the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama cause. sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is closed with more force. If the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 116 117 Useful information ............................ 118 Correct driver's seat position .......... 118 Seats .................................................. 119 Steering wheel .................................. 125 Mirrors ............................................... 127 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function ............................... 130 118 Correct driver's seat position Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 119). X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjusted. Manual and electrical seat adjustment (Y page 120) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 121) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly Ryour legs are not fully extended X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted correctly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 125). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted correctly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 125) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 126) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 47). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 49). Seats Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed across your hips in the pelvic area X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions (Y page 128). X Vehicles with memory function: you can store the seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and head-up display settings with the memory function (Y page 131). This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the engine. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Seats G WARNING Important safety notes If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 51) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 63). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it can move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat belt should: 119 120 Seats abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. Adjusting the seats manually and electrically Adjusting the front seat Vehicles without the seating comfort package Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. : Backrest angle ; Seat height = Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Vehicles with the seating comfort package ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 122). Vehicles without the through-loading feature: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. i Further related subjects: RRear bench seat through-loading feature (Y page 371) : ; = ? A Backrest angle Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seat cushion length i In vehicles with the seating comfort package, the seat cushion length can only be adjusted manually. Seats Vehicles without the seating comfort package X Lift handle = and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever = again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. Vehicles with the seating comfort package X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever ? again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. Adjusting the seat cushion length manually Lift handle A and slide the seat cushion forwards or backwards. X Release lever A again. The seat cushion engages. i Manual seat cushion length adjustment is only available in vehicles with the seating comfort package. X Adjusts the seats electrically A Seat cushion angle B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i Further related subjects: RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 131). PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position (Y page 62). RIf Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. General notes : ; = ? Head restraint height Backrest angle Seat height Seat cushion length Observe the important safety notes (Y page 119). Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft 121 Seats 122 Adjusting the head restraint height manually Adjusting the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for the head restraint adjustment (Y page 121) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the head restraint fore-andaft position manually If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is necessary to press release catch :. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Fitting and removing rear head restraints This function allows you to adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position. X To move backwards: press and hold release button :. X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position. X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly. Seats Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support : ; = ? To raise the backrest contour To soften the backrest contour To lower the backrest contour To harden the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Switching the seat heating on/off Activating/deactivating G WARNING temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. X i If drive program E is selected, the power of the seat heating is reduced. RManual transmission (Y page 192) transmission (Y page 197) RAutomatic If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards (Y page 372). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages. X 123 124 Seats Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be switched back on manually. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Activating/deactivating The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 107). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation. Steering wheel 125 Problems with the seat ventilation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Steering wheel Important safety notes Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical conswitched off premasumers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation can be switched back on. Adjusting the steering wheel manually G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Z 126 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel electrically : To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) ; To adjust the steering wheel height i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 126) RStoring settings (Y page 131) ROperating the on-board computer (Y page 294). EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. Press one of the memory function position buttons. The adjustment process is stopped. This function is only available on vehicles with a memory function. G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate Audio 20/ COMAND Online operating instructions. Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver's seat moves backwards if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 the key: open the driver's door; the key must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 181) Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is switched off Rwith i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering wheel has been adjusted (Y page 131). Mirrors The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored using the memory function (Y page 131) 127 Mirrors Rear-view mirror i The steering wheel only moves upwards if Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the key into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO i The steering wheel only returns to the last set position if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering wheel has been adjusted (Y page 131). The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off setting is stored using the memory function (Y page 131) Rthe Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions. X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors it has not already reached the upper steering limiter. Mirrors 128 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror or button = for the left-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button : as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button : up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically X The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. X i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the Automatic mirror-folding function function in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically If the Automatic mirror-folding func‐ tion function is activated in COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate COMAND Online or Audio 20 operating instructions), Mirrors soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows: Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button : until you hear a click and then the mirror engaging in position (Y page 128). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 128). X Rif electrolyte comes into contact with skin or eyes or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Rimmediately change out of clothing that has been in contact with electrolyte. Rif an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Using reverse gear Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass of an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: Rimmediately rinse off electrolyte from your skin with water. Rimmediately and thoroughly rinse electrolyte out of eyes using clean water. Rif electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. : Memory button M ; Adjustment button = Button for the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side ? Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- er's side You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as 129 Memory function 130 Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Using the memory button You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M :. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. X Press memory button M : and one of the arrows on adjustment button ; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button =. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: X Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button ? for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. Memory function Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the Rseat Rsteering wheel Rexterior mirrors Rhead-up display are in the stored position. i The steering wheel and seat adjustment procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. The adjustment of the mirror is still carried out. X Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rseat heating: cushion surfaces Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 121). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 126) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 128). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 131 132 133 Useful information ............................ 134 Exterior lighting ................................ 134 Interior lighting ................................. 140 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) ........................................ 141 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) ............................... 142 Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers ........................... 145 134 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Lights and windscreen wipers ist workshops: (Y page 27). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad General notes If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (only vehicles with Intelligent Light System). This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. ments are fulfilled without switching the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. Vehicles with Intelligent Light System Before crossing the border, set the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam and after returning back to asymmetrical dipped beam via the "Dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left" function in the on-board computer (Y page 311). If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions are not available. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set by: Rusing the light switch the combination switch (Y page 137) Radjusting the headlamp range (vehicles with halogen headlamps only) (Y page 136) Rusing the on-board computer (Y page 311) Rusing Light switch Operation Vehicles with halogen or static LED headlamps It is not necessary to switch your headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered. Legal require- 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand side lamps Exterior lighting ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 Ropen Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. When the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green T (side lamps) and L (dipped-beam headlamps) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. à is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): Rkey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light Rwith the engine running: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the parking and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Dipped-beam headlamps When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in position L, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Rear foglamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Z Lights and windscreen wipers 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- 135 Exterior lighting 136 Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Lights and windscreen wipers X Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left parking lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) Headlamp range control g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied 1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied, boot laden 3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu- pied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. X X Start the engine. Turn the headlamp range control to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Exterior lighting Combination switch Turn signals 137 If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the mainbeam headlamps (Y page 139). Headlamp flasher To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. Hazard warning lamps : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X Main-beam headlamps To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: Ran airbag is deployed or vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps continue to operate even if the ignition is switched off. Rthe Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 138 Exterior lighting Intelligent Light System Cornering light function Lights and windscreen wipers General notes The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" function using the on-board computer (Y page 311). Active light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while you are driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on Motorway mode Active: if you are driving at a speed above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation Extended range foglamps The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus General notes With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can automatically switch between dipped-beam, partial main-beam and main-beam headlamps. Partial main-beam illumination is a form of illumination whereby the main beam is directed past other road users. Other road users are kept out of the main-beam. This prevents glare. If there is a vehicle in front, for example, the main-beam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by the dipped-beam headlamps. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. If the main-beam or partial main-beam headlamps are causing too much reflection from traffic signs, the lights are automatically dimmed and glare for the driver caused by the reflections is thus avoided. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not recognise road users who do have lights, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Z 139 Lights and windscreen wipers Exterior lighting Interior lighting 140 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured Lights and windscreen wipers Rdirt Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h: The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 30 km/h and no other road users are recognised: The main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds above 45 km/h and other road users are recognised: Partial main-beam is selected automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 40 km/h: The partial main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. If no other road users are recognised, the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X If you are driving at speeds below approximately 25 km/h or the roads are adequately illuminated: The main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Headlamps misted up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = c Switches the front interior lighting on/off Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) A p Switches the right-hand front read- The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted using COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Control panel in the grab handle (rear compartment) Manual interior lighting control ? u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ing lamp on/off To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. 141 Crash-responsive emergency lighting : Reading lamp ; p Switches the reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time, unless the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour, brightness and display lamp for the ambient lighting may be set using COMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 142 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Important safety notes G WARNING Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb type can be found in the legend. Lights and windscreen wipers Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only fit spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 142). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W Tail lamp (halogen headlamps) : Turn signal lamp: P 21 W ; Reversing lamp: W 16 W Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Fitting/removing the cover on the front wheel arch Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Main-beam headlamps You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. To remove: switch off the lights. Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : 180° outwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is released. X Fold cover ; upwards. X To fit: insert cover ; into the left, right and two lower catches. X Turn rotary knob : 180° inwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is locked. X X Dipped-beam headlamps X X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Replacing the front bulbs 143 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 144 Turn signals You must open the side trim panel in the boot before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. To open: release right or left side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. X Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the boot. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 144). Lights and windscreen wipers X Remove the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 143). X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise, unlock it and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 143). X X X X Pull out the plug. Turn wing nut : 90° anti-clockwise and remove the bulb holder. Replacing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels Turn signal lamp ;: lightly press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reversing lamp =: remove the bulb from the bulb holder. X Example: right-hand side trim panel Windscreen wipers 145 Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. Insert the bulb holder again. X Turn wing nut : 90° clockwise. X Insert the connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 144). X X Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind- screen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wipers to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers 146 Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Lights and windscreen wipers ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Moving the wiper blades to the vertical position On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Set the windscreen wipers to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. X Removing the wiper blades Hold onto the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windscreen wipers to position °. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windscreen wipers start. X X X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Windscreen wipers 147 Fitting the wiper blades Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Lights and windscreen wipers X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X Remove the protective film of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. X i If the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. The duration of the colour change varies depending on the terms of use. Z 148 Windscreen wipers Problems with the windscreen wipers Lights and windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist worknozzles no longer hits shop. the centre of the windscreen. 149 Useful information ............................ 150 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 150 Operating the climate control system ..................................................... 156 Climate control Adjusting the air vents ..................... 177 150 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops: (Y page 27). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly Rswitch off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate. For vehicles without hybrid drive, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is available when the engine is running. For hybrid vehicles, the cooling with air dehumidification function is also available via the electric refrigerant compressor when the engine is not running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 166). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 107). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odours. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As this depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i It is possible that the blower may be activated automatically 60 minutes after the key has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the automatic climate control. Overview of climate control systems 151 Vehicles with auxiliary heating : To set the temperature, left (Y page 160) ; To set the air distribution (Y page 161) = To set the airflow (Y page 162) To switch the climate control off (Y page 156) ? To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 159) A To demist the windscreen (Y page 163) B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu; see the separate operating C D E F G instructions To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 166) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164) To switch the auxiliary heating on/off (Y page 172) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 157) To set the temperature, right (Y page 160) Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) Climate control 152 Overview of climate control systems Vehicles without auxiliary heating : To set the temperature, left (Y page 160) ; To set the air distribution (Y page 161) = To set the airflow (Y page 162) To switch the climate control off (Y page 156) ? To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 159) A To demist the windscreen (Y page 163) B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu; see the separate operating C D E F G instructions To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164) To activate/deactivate synchronisation (Y page 162) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 157) To set the temperature, right (Y page 160) Information on using THERMATIC automatic climate control THERMATIC automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of THERMATIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is not activated automatically in automatic mode. If necessary, activate this function (Y page 157). RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the windscreen demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. Overview of climate control systems 153 AGILITY SELECT switch You can choose between various drive programs with the AGILITY SELECT switch. RManual transmission (Y page 191) transmission (Y page 197) If you have selected drive program E, the climate control switches to Eco mode. In Eco mode: RAutomatic Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window heating running time is reduced If you have selected drive program C, S or S+ the climate control switches to Comfort mode. The current climate control settings are maintained in Comfort mode. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 187). Hybrid vehicles The cooling with air dehumidification function is available when the vehicle is operational and the READY indicator is lit (Y page 276). If the internal combustion engine has been shut off automatically, the set interior temperature will be maintained for a certain period of time. Climate control Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster 154 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone) Vehicles with auxiliary heating Front control panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 160) ; To set the air distribution, left (Y page 161) = To set the airflow (Y page 162) To switch the climate control off (Y page 156) ? To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 159) A To demist the windscreen (Y page 163) B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu; see the separate operating C D E F G H I J instructions To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 166) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164) To switch the auxiliary heating on/off (Y page 172) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165) To set the air distribution, right (Y page 161) To set the temperature, right (Y page 160) Rear control panel To set the temperature (Y page 160) Display To set the airflow (Y page 162) Vehicles without auxiliary heating Front control panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 160) ; To set the air distribution, left (Y page 161) = To set the airflow (Y page 162) To switch the climate control off (Y page 156) ? To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 159) A To demist the windscreen (Y page 163) B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu; see the separate operating C D E F G H I J instructions To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 166) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 157) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165) To set the air distribution, right (Y page 161) To set the temperature, right (Y page 160) Rear control panel To set the temperature (Y page 160) Display To set the airflow (Y page 162) Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is not activated automatically in automatic 155 Climate control Overview of climate control systems Climate control 156 Operating the climate control system mode. If necessary, activate this function (Y page 157). RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the windscreen demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. The residual heat function is deactivated when the ignition is switched on. AGILITY SELECT switch You can choose between various drive programs with the AGILITY SELECT switch. RManual transmission (Y page 191) transmission (Y page 197) If you have selected drive program E, the climate control switches to Eco mode. In Eco mode: RAutomatic Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window heating running time is reduced If you have selected drive program C, S or S+ the climate control switches to Comfort mode. The current climate control settings are maintained in Comfort mode. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 187). Hybrid vehicles The cooling with air dehumidification function is available when the vehicle is operational and the READY indicator is lit (Y page 276). If the internal combustion engine has been shut off automatically, the set interior temperature will be maintained for a certain period of time. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. Switch on climate control primarily using the à rocker switch (Y page 159). Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To switch on: press the t/! rocker switch up or down. The Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu opens. X Activate the climate control using the airconditioning function bar; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions. or X Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button. X Operating the climate control system Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function only briefly. For vehicles without hybrid drive, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is available when the engine is running. For hybrid vehicles, the cooling with air dehumidification function is also available via the electric refrigerant compressor when the engine is not running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating THERMATIC automatic climate control X To activate: press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up. or X Activate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). X To deactivate: press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out. or X Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control without auxiliary heating X To activate: press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up. or X Activate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). X To deactivate: press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out. or X Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). Climate control To switch off: press the t/! rocker switch up or down. The Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu opens. X Deactivate the climate control using the air-conditioning function bar; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions. or X Set the airflow to level 0 using the H rocker switch. X 157 158 Operating the climate control system Climate control THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control with auxiliary heating You can activate or deactivate the cooling with air dehumidification function using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Operating the climate control system 159 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions THERMOTRONIC with auxiliary heating: cooling with air dehumidification can no longer be switched on using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. THERMATIC/ The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivaTHERMOTRONIC ted due to a malfunction. without auxiliary X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. heating: the indicator lamp in the ¿ button flashes three times or remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification function can also no longer be activated using Audio 20/COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function must be activated manually in automatic mode. If necessary, "Cooling with air dehumidification" can also be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehi- cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only switch off cooling with air dehumidification for a short period. Climate control Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Operating the climate control system 160 Automatic control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Set the desired temperature using the w rocker switch on the front control unit. or X Set the desired temperature using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X To activate: press the à rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. X To switch to manual operation: press the H rocker switch up or down. or X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. or X Press the upper or lower section of the _ rocker switch. or X Set the air distribution using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. Climate control X In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up again. In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings for the driver's and frontpassenger areas: FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less of a draught X To set: set the climate mode using Audio 20/COMAND Online (see separate operating instructions). Setting the temperature THERMATIC automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch. or X Set the temperature using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control General notes Setting the climate mode This function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones Operating the climate control system Setting the temperature in the front compartment using the front control panel X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch. or X Set the temperature using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Set the temperature with the w rocker switch on the front control panel. or X Set the temperature using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X Press the upper or lower section of the ! rocker switch. The climate control menu in Audio 20/ COMAND Online opens. X Select the synchronisation function; see separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch on the rear control panel (Y page 154). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The set temperature appears on the rearcompartment display. Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic Setting THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: you can set the air distribution separately for the driver's and front-passenger side. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 181). X Press the _ button up or down. The various air distribution settings appear in Audio 20/COMAND Online. Climate control You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. 161 Operating the climate control system 162 X Press and hold the _ button upwards until the desired position is reached. or X Set the air distribution using Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Setting the airflow THERMATIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the H rocker switch. or X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Climate control X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Setting the front-compartment airflow You can set the airflow separately for the front and rear compartment. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the H rocker switch. or X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. Setting the rear compartment airflow X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press the upper or lower section of the ! rocker switch. The Audio 20/COMAND Online climate control menu opens. X Select the synchronisation function in the climate control menu; see separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions. The airflow setting for the front area is adopted for the rear compartment. Setting the rear compartment airflow using the rear control panel X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the K/I rocker switch on the rear control panel. The selected airflow level is shown in the rear-compartment display. Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function General notes Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control, the temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side and rear compartment. Activating/deactivating THERMATIC automatic climate control without auxiliary heating X Press the 0 rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the 0 rocker switch lights up or goes out. or X Activate/deactivate the synchronisation function using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions). The synchronisation function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed. Operating the climate control system The synchronisation function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control X Activate/deactivate the synchronisation function using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions). The synchronisation function is deactivated: Rif the settings for the front-passenger side are changed Rif the settings for the rear compartment are changed Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. In this case, the indicator lamp above the ¿ button remains switched off. X To deactivate: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the top or bottom section of the à rocker switch. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Demisting the windscreen X General notes You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the front side windows. Switch off the windscreen demisting function as soon as the windscreen is clear again. Activating/deactivating the windscreen demisting function Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To activate: press the ¬ rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch lights up. The current climate control settings are deactivated. The climate control system switches to the following functions: X Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function with the ¿ rocker switch. or Activate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. For THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control with auxiliary heating, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function can only be activated using Audio 20/COMAND Online. X Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the windscreen demisting function using the ¬ rocker switch. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Climate control THERMATIC automatic climate control with auxiliary heating X Activate/deactivate the synchronisation function using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions). 163 Operating the climate control system 164 Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not mist up so quickly. X X Rear window heating Climate control General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker switch lights up or goes out. X Operating the climate control system 165 Problems with the rear window heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again. General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5 † approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5 † if the cooling with air dehumidification function is activated Rafter Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To activate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch lights up. X Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution (THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control only) Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system only) The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. Z Climate control Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode Operating the climate control system 166 When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, press the W switch immediately to open/close the side window in the door. The side window stops. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. Convenience closing feature (vehicles with a sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof start to close automatically. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience closing feature (vehicles without a sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows start to close automatically. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If you open the side windows or the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof manually after closing them with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Climate control X If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: Press the W button for opening/closing the side windows. The side windows stop. X To then open the side window, press the W button again. X Only vehicles with sliding sunroof/ panorama sliding sunroof: press the X 3 switch to open/close the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof stops. X To then open the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof, pull back on the 3 button. Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side windows (Y page 106) sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 111) X Convenience opening feature (vehicles with a sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof start to open automatically. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. X Convenience opening feature (vehicles without a sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof): press and hold the g rocker switch up or down until the side windows start to open automatically. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. Rthe Activating/deactivating the residual heat function General notes The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control and THERMATIC automatic climate control with auxiliary heating. Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time depends on the set interior temperature. Operating the climate control system Activating/deactivating tally responsible recycling system. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 181). X To activate: press the ! rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker switch lights up. X Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on Perfume atomiser Operating the perfume atomiser G WARNING If children open the perfume vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficulties, consult a doctor. H Environmental note Full perfume vials must not be disposed of with household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmen- : Perfume lid ; Perfume vial The perfume atomiser helps to improve driving comfort. Using Audio 20/COMAND Online, you can: Rswitch the perfume atomiser on/off (see separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions) Rregulate the perfume intensity (see the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions) The following conditions can affect your perception of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the automatic climate control Rinterior temperature Rtime of year/day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fatigue or hunger The perfume atomiser can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on and is only active when the glove compartment is closed. The perfume atomiser is provided with a prefilled perfume vial. You can also choose from Z Climate control Dispose of full perfume vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a special waste collection point. The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the ! rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker switch goes out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rwhen 167 Operating the climate control system 168 a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial. ! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz Climate control interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove compartment (Y page 369). X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial. To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself. X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the desired liquid perfume. X Screw the lid back on to the vial. X ! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it. Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might not achieve optimum results from the perfume atomiser. Operating the climate control system 169 Problems with the perfume atomiser Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The perfume atomiser is faulty. Have the perfume atomiser checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Ionisation Ionisation is used to purify and freshen the air in the vehicle interior, which is conducive to a pleasant climate. The ionisation of the interior air is odourless and cannot, directly, be perceived in the vehicle interior. You can switch ionisation on/off using Audio 20/COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). Ionisation can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open. Pre-entry climate control General notes The pre-entry climate control function is only available for hybrid vehicles. Before getting in, the driver's seat area can be briefly warmed or ventilated in advance and the air from the air vents can be pre-cooled. The high-voltage battery must be sufficiently charged before the pre-entry climate control can be activated. When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the following functions are activated: Rautomatic climate control Rblower Rseat ventilation If the vehicle is preheated, the seat heating is activated. If you have switched on the perfume atomiser or ionisation using Audio 20/COMAND Online, these will be activated together with the pre-entry climate control. Switching on the perfume atomiser/ionisation (see the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions). Activating/deactivating the pre-entry climate control Before the pre-entry climate control can be activated, you must activate the function via Audio 20/COMAND Online (see separate operating instructions). Z Climate control The vehicle interior is The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it not perfumed although will go. the perfume atomiser is X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. activated. The perfume vial is not adequately filled. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the same perfume. Operating the climate control system 170 X To activate pre-entry climate control: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The air-conditioning functions are activated for up to 120 seconds for preheating and for up to 60 seconds for pre-cooling. Climate control The pre-entry climate control switches off automatically when the engine is started. Seat heating (heating), seat ventilation (ventilation), perfume atomiser and ionisation remain switched on after starting the engine. Operating the climate control system 171 Problems with the pre-entry climate control Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The charge status of the high-voltage battery is under the specified minimum charge status. X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill. The internal combustion engine drives the electric motor. The electric motor is operating as an alternator. The high-voltage battery is charging. The pre-entry climate control was started more than twice when the engine was switched off. X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds. X Try again to switch the pre-entry climate control on. The difference between the interior temperature and the desired temperature is too small. X Increase the difference between the interior temperature and the desired temperature. Remote activation of heating and ventilation system General notes Remote activation is only available on vehicles with the BlueEFFICIENCY package. The driver's and front-passenger seat areas can also be heated or ventilated when the engine is switched off. The starter battery must be sufficiently charged before remote activation can be switched on. When the vehicle is heated, the following functions are activated: Rseat heating window heating Rexterior mirror heating When the vehicle is ventilated, the following functions are activated: Rrear If you have activated ionisation using Audio 20/COMAND Online (see separate operating instructions), it is activated together with the remote activation function. Activating/deactivating the remote activation function X To switch on remote activation: push the climate control symbol button on the key. The air-conditioning functions are switched on, for up to 10 minutes for heating and up to 120 minutes for ventilation. Remote activation switches off automatically if: Rthe ignition is switched on, or engine is started Seat heating (heating), seat ventilation (ventilation) and ionisation remain switched on after starting the engine. Rthe Rblower Rseat ventilation Z Climate control Further information on charging the high-voltage battery (Y page 416). 172 Operating the climate control system Problems with remote activation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Remote activation can- Remote activation was started more than three times when the not be switched on or engine was switched off. has switched itself off. X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds. X Try again to switch remote activation on. Climate control The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the starter battery. X Try again to switch remote activation on. Auxiliary heating Important safety notes G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. Rthe When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. The auxiliary heating is fitted under the front wing on the right-hand side of the vehicle. The emissions outlet is found behind the front wheel on the right hand side of the vehicle. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the aux- Operating the climate control system Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console rocker switch The colours of the indicator lamps in the rocker switch have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Set the desired temperature using the w rocker switch on the front control unit. or X Set the desired temperature using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X If you do not alter the temperature before switching on the auxiliary heating, the last temperature setting will be adopted. Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also be switched on if the manually set climate control is activated. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. You can activate or deactivate the auxiliary heating/ventilation: Rusing the rocker switch on the centre console (Y page 173) Rusing the remote control (Y page 173) The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected: Rusing the remote control (Y page 173) Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions Rusing To switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation on: press rocker switch : up or down. The red or the blue indicator lamp above rocker switch : lights up. X To set the temperature: switch on auxiliary heating/ventilation. Audio 20/COMAND Online is activated for approximately one minute. X Set the desired temperature using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X To switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation off: press rocker switch : up or down. The red or the blue indicator lamp above rocker switch : goes out. X Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control General notes Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Z Climate control iliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off when the engine is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation is not active if the engine is running. The auxiliary heating/ventilation switches off automatically after 30 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. 173 174 Operating the climate control system Store the remote control for the auxiliary heating so that the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on unintentionally. In particular, ensure that the remote control for the auxiliary heating is kept out of the reach of children. The remote control has a range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Climate control Rsolid i The optimum range can be achieved if you hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. If the remote control battery is low, the battery symbol on the left of the display is shown as empty. Replace the remote control battery and observe the important safety notes when doing so (Y page 175). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off To switch on: press and hold the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. X To switch off: press and hold the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Briefly press the u button. The following messages may appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. Remote control : Display ; u Switches on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation/checks status = . Sets the departure time ? ^ Switches off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , Sets the departure time Operating the climate control system A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently activated. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes. If the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started, the auxiliary heating running time is increased. The auxiliary heating continues to run until the operating temperature is reached. If this is the case, the y symbol appears in the remote control display and the running time is zero minutes. Setting the departure time Make sure that the time set in the vehicle is correct before setting the departure time (see separate operating instructions). Otherwise, the auxiliary heating may switch on at the wrong time and at an unsuitable location. When setting the departure time, also observe the important safety notes (Y page 172). Briefly press the u button. Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X X X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating the set departure time X Briefly press the u button. X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C appear in the display. Deactivating the set departure time Briefly press the u button. X Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Replacing the remote control battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Z Climate control A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently activated. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes. 175 176 Operating the climate control system Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Climate control H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Replacing the battery If the battery needs to be replaced, the battery symbol on the left of the display is shown as empty. A CR2450 lithium battery is required when replacing the battery. X Press a pointed object into recess :. X Slide battery cover ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove old battery =. X Insert the new battery with the lettering facing upwards. Slide battery cover ; in the opposite direction to the arrow on the remote control until it engages. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. X Adjusting the air vents 177 Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation FAIL ¨ FAIL Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. FAIL ¯ The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior Z Climate control Display messages Adjusting the air vents 178 Adjusting the centre air vents To open/close: turn thumbwheel ?, A or B to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold centre air vent :, ; or = by thumbwheel ?, A or B and move it up or down or to the left or right. Vehicles with THERMATIC automatic climate control Climate control X Adjusting the side air vents Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control : Rear-compartment air vent, left ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ? Rear control panel To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent : or ; by the middle fin and move up or down or to the left or right. X : Side window demister vent ; Side air vent, left = Thumbwheel for left side air vent To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ; by thumbwheel = and move it up or down or to the left or right. X Setting the rear-compartment air vents Rear air vents are not available in all vehicles. 179 Useful information ............................ 180 Running-in notes ............................... 180 Manual transmission ........................ 190 Automatic transmission ................... 193 Refuelling ........................................... 200 Parking ............................................... 207 Driving tips ........................................ 211 Driving systems ................................ 216 Hybrid operation ............................... 269 Towing a trailer ................................. 283 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 180 180 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Running-in notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1,500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying road speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RWhen changing gears manually, change up in good time, before the rev counter needle reaches Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RVehicles with automatic transmission: try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1,500 km, you may gradually accelerate the vehicle to full road and engine speeds. You should also observe these notes on running-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the applicable speed limit. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake Driving G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. Hybrid vehicles: observe the safety instructions for hybrid vehicles (Y page 269). Key positions Key 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 Starting the engine i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on The engine cannot be started. Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open the shutters in the radiator trim by turning the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. After approximately 120 seconds the shutters open automatically. Further information on opening and cleaning the shutters (Y page 400). Start/Stop button General notes A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the key: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock Rthe key must be in the vehicle Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91) Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. Do not keep the key: Rwith g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality. Z Driving and parking boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 181 182 Driving If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Driving and parking Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 97), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/ Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. The power supply is switched off again if: X Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in this position Removing the Start/Stop button Key positions with the Start/Stop button If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. It is only possible to switch between Start/ Stop button mode and key operation when the transmission is in position P. When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. General notes Vehicles with a petrol engine: the catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Manual transmission You can only start the engine when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral N. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 193). The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 195). You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the key To start the engine using the key instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 181) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 181) and release it as soon as the engine is running. You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. Z Driving and parking Starting the engine 183 Driving 184 If the engine will not start: Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Reinsert the key into the ignition lock after a short waiting period. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up (Y page 351). X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 181) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Driving and parking X Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button is only available on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESSGO start function. The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid key is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/ Stop button once (Y page 181). The engine starts. X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ Stop button once (Y page 181). Preglow is activated and the engine starts. Pulling away Manual transmission ! Change gear in good time and avoid spinning the wheels. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. X Release the electric parking brake (Y page 209). X Release the brake pedal. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. X Follow the shift recommendations in the multifunction display for an economical driving style (Y page 191). The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature, see the Digital Owner's Manual. Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release park. brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake. Driving It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature; see the Digital Owner's Manual. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Pulling away with a trailer Press and hold handle :. The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains lit. X Depress the accelerator pedal. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever :. the electric parking brake is released. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X For further information on the electric parking brake, see (Y page 209). Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. X Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake. are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Z Driving and parking Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake (Y page 209) is automatically released. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X 185 186 Driving ECO start/stop function Driving and parking Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes : ECO start/stop display If the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically once the vehicle stops moving. The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 187) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the è ECO symbol is not displayed. Automatic engine switch-off General notes The ECO start/stop function is operational and the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button lights up green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rno electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer or another carrier system (e.g. bicycle rack) Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If the conditions for automatic engine switchoff are not all fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in yellow. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. Vehicles with manual transmission The ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically at low speeds. Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if: Brake the vehicle. Shift to neutral N (follow gearshift instruction : to shift into neutral N, if necessary). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automatically. Ryou X X Vehicles with automatic transmission If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. switch to drive program S+ Rin transmission position D or N, the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou shift from transmission position P Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the è ECO symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. Switching off/on the ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start General notes The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low Vehicles with manual transmission ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. The engine is started automatically when you depress the clutch pedal. To switch off: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the è ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To switch on: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 186) are met, the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 186) are met, the è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. X If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will Z 187 Driving and parking Driving Driving and parking 188 Driving then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO button :, the ECO start/stop function is activated. Driving 189 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 232) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222). X Try to start the engine again (Y page 183). The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. RThere X Try to start the engine again (Y page 183). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display is at the reserve level. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 418). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. Try to start the engine again (Y page 183). X If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 190 Manual transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. A X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to display message may cool down. also appear in the mul- X Check the coolant level (Y page 393). Observe the warning tifunction display and a notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. warning tone may sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Manual transmission Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. This uses the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, you should always push the gear lever all the way to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a k Reverse gear 1 - 6 Forward gears Manual transmission C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition: in drive program E the accelerator pedal also transmits double pulses. Additional information for drive programs (Y page 192). AGILITY SELECT switch Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Move the gear lever to position N :. X Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. X Move the gear lever firmly to the left, beyond the point of resistance, then forwards. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/stop function; see (Y page 186). Gearshift recommendation Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 186) Rthe climate control settings - THERMATIC (Y page 153) - THERMOTRONIC (Y page 156) Rthe rear window heating operation period (Y page 164) Rthe performance of the seat heating (Y page 123) If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift gear according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Z Driving and parking Shifting to neutral N 191 Manual transmission 192 Driving and parking X Push AGILITY SELECT switch : up or down until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. Available drive programs: Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits extremely sporty driving characteristics Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available I Individual Individual settings Drive program S (Sport) S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty driving characteristics Drive program S is characterised by the following: S Sport Sporty driving characteristics Rthe C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics E Eco Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 192). Drive programs Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering RC 180 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY Edition: availability of the economical accelerator pedal Information about the selection of drive program I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Drive program E (Eco) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe performance of the air-conditioning and heating systems are reduced. Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Important safety notes DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions Bear in mind that power transmission between the engine and the transmission is interrupted when the engine is switched off. For this reason, shift the automatic transmission to P when the engine is switched off and the vehicle is stationary. Apply the electric parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Hybrid Vehicles: observe the safety instructions for hybrid vehicles (Y page 269). j k i h Driving and parking G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. 193 Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 195). Engaging park position P ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear Z Automatic transmission 194 i Neutral h Drive Driving and parking X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the key and remove the key switch off the engine using the Start/ Stop button and open the driver's door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Ryou Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 186). Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Rclimb Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open one of the front doors or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: With the key: Switch the ignition on. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X With the Start/Stop button: Switch the ignition on. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. Transmission positions B Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 193) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In order to secure the vehicle, always engage the electric parking brake in addition to the parking lock. The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you: Rremove the key Rswitch off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission position and drive program display ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. : Status symbol drive program ; Transmission position = Gear Z 195 Driving and parking Automatic transmission 196 Automatic transmission Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch off the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to neutral N automatically. Driving and parking A ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. 7 Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 197) position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Rocking the vehicle free Rocking the vehicle free by shifting the transmission repeatedly between transmission positions D and R may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management restricts repeated shifting between gears D and R up to a maximum speed of 9 km/h. To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance. Towing a trailer Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Manual shifting: depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, shift into a gear (Y page 198) in which the engine will run in the middle of the engine speed range. This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated. AGILITY SELECT switch Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 186) Rthe climate control settings - THERMATIC (Y page 153) - THERMOTRONIC (Y page 156) Rthe rear window heating operation period (Y page 164) Rthe performance of the seat heating (Y page 123) If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics E Eco Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 197). Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can temporarily change gear yourself. Further information on the manual drive program (Y page 198). Drive programs Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe X Push AGILITY SELECT switch : up or down until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering To permanently select the gears in the drive program I using the steering wheel paddles, select the permanent manual gearshift program. Information about the selection of drive program I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Z 197 Driving and parking Automatic transmission 198 Automatic transmission Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Driving and parking Drive program S+ is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits extremely sporty driving characteristics Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Drive program E (Eco) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (overrun mode). Rthe performance of the air-conditioning and heating systems are reduced. Manual gearshifting General notes Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up : Left steering wheel gearshift paddle: shifts down ; Right steering wheel gearshift paddle: shifts up Automatic transmission Gearshift recommendation Activating X X Shift the transmission to position D. Pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198). Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily. The selected gear appears in the multifunction display. Further information on activating manual gearshifting in hybrid vehicles (Y page 278). Shifting gears Pulling on the left or right gear shift paddle allows you to shift gears yourself for a limited time. Depending on which gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear up or down, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Deactivating If you have activated manual gearshifting, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. You can also deactivate manual gearshifting: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in place (Y page 198). or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the transmission position. or X Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the drive program (Y page 197). Manual gearshifting is deactivated. Z Driving and parking Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can temporarily change gear yourself. The transmission must be in position D. 199 200 Refuelling Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Problems with hybrid operation (Y page 282). Transfer case This section only applies to vehicles with allwheel drive (4MATIC). The front and rear axles are constantly driven. ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a two-axle roller dynamometer. Otherwise, the braking system or the transfer case could be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information on performance tests. ! Since ESP® engages automatically, the ignition must be switched off (the key or Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested using a brake dynamometer. vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). The brake system could otherwise be damaged. Rthe ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel Refuelling RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 468). Refuelling General notes Observe the important safety notes (Y page 200). If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Z Driving and parking vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: 201 Refuelling 202 Opening the fuel filler flap Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Driving and parking X Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tyre pressure table Fuel type to be refuelled Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X X Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps. Refuelling 203 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The engine does not start. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 181). X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds (Y page 181). X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problem Driving and parking 204 Refuelling Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The key battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 91). or X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 93). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. AdBlue® (BlueTEC vehicles only) Important notes on use To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing agent AdBlue®. Topping up AdBlue® is part of the maintenance work. When the supply of AdBlue® is down to approximately 3.0 litres, the Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual message is shown in the multifunction display. When the AdBlue® supply drops to a minimum, the Refill AdBlue No start in X km message is shown in the multifunction display. If you drive the vehicle faster than 15 km/h, the Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual message goes out after approximately one minute. If the Refill AdBlue No start in X km message is shown in the multifunction display, you can still drive the vehicle over the distance shown. If the AdBlue® is not topped up, you will subsequently be unable to start the engine. If the Refill AdBlue Start not possible message appears in the multifunction display and the engine does not start, you must top up AdBlue®. Add at least 3.5 l of AdBlue®. Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. X Start the engine. X X i You can also have the AdBlue® tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. Before driving your vehicle outside Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and about AdBlue® can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Important notes on the refilling procedure AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnon-toxic Rcolourless and odourless Rnon-flammable If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, Refuelling rinse AdBlue® off your skin with soap and water. Rif AdBlue® comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. Rif AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention immediately. Rchange immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with AdBlue®. Rimmediately ! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with AdBlue®, and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. ! In order to fill the AdBlue® tank, the vehicle must be parked on a level surface. The AdBlue® tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. Fluctuations in capacity will thus be avoided. Filling a vehicle standing on an uneven surface is not permitted. There is a danger of overfilling, which can cause damage to BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment components. ! Surfaces which have come into contact with AdBlue® while refilling should be rinsed immediately with water, or remove AdBlue® with a moist cloth and cold water. If AdBlue® has already crystallised, use a sponge and cold water to clean the area. AdBlue® residue crystallises after a certain amount of time and soils the affected surfaces. ! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If AdBlue® is added to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage. Have the AdBlue® tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. However, you can also top up the AdBlue® tank: a filling station with an AdBlue® filling pump Rwith AdBlue® refill bottles Rwith an AdBlue® refill canister When the pump nozzle switches off automatically during filling at a filling pump, the AdBlue® tank has been completely filled. Do not fill the AdBlue® tank any further. AdBlue® may leak out. To avoid transporting already opened refill containers in the vehicle, completely empty refill bottles or canisters when filling the AdBlue® tank, if possible. Further information on AdBlue® (Y page 472). Rat Opening the AdBlue® filler cap Example: Saloon Z Driving and parking nose and throat. You may also experience coughing and watery eyes. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in wellventilated areas. Do not swallow AdBlue® or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Keep AdBlue® away from children. If you or others come into contact with AdBlue®, observe the following: 205 Refuelling 206 Switch the ignition off. Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn blue AdBlue® filler cap ; anti-clockwise and remove it. AdBlue® filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip. X Driving and parking X i The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle. AdBlue® refill canisters ! Do not tighten the disposable hose with too much force. The disposable hose may otherwise be destroyed. Disposable hose : remains closed until you fasten disposable hose : to the AdBlue® filler neck of the vehicle. X Place disposable hose : on the filler neck on the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. When you feel resistance, disposable hose : is sufficiently secured. X Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister ;. Filling stops when the AdBlue® tank is completely filled. Do not fill the AdBlue® tank any further. AdBlue® refill canister ; can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. X Turn disposable hose : on the filler neck of the vehicle anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn disposable hose : on the opening of AdBlue® refill canister ; anti-clockwise and remove it. X Reseal AdBlue® refill canister ; with the cap. AdBlue® refill canisters are available at many filling stations or at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. AdBlue® refill canisters are often sold with a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit the vehicle's AdBlue® tank offers no protection against overfilling. AdBlue® may leak out as a result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers a special disposable hose with overfill protection. You can obtain this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. AdBlue® is available in a variety of containers and receptacles. Only use the disposable hose with the Mercedes-Benz AdBlue® refill canisters. AdBlue® refill bottle Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of AdBlue® refill canister ;. X Place disposable hose : on the opening of AdBlue® refill canister ; and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. X ! Screw on the AdBlue® refill bottle only hand-tight. It may otherwise be destroyed. Parking 207 Unscrew the protective cap from AdBlue® refill bottle :. X Place AdBlue® refill bottle : on the filler neck as shown and screw it on hand-tight. X Press AdBlue® refill bottle : towards the filler neck. The AdBlue® tank is filled. This could last up to one minute. When AdBlue® refill bottle : is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be taken off again after being only partially emptied. X Release AdBlue® refill bottle :. X Turn AdBlue® refill bottle : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Screw the protective cap onto AdBlue® refill bottle : again. X AdBlue® refill bottles are available at many filling stations or at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Refill bottles without a threaded seal offer no protection against overfilling. AdBlue® may leak out as a result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded cap. These are available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Example: Saloon Fit AdBlue® filler cap ; on the filler neck and turn it clockwise. X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the direction of arrow :. X Drive faster than 15 km/h. The Refill AdBlue See Owner's Man‐ ual message goes out after approximately one minute. X If the Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual message continues to be shown in the multifunction display, you must top up with more AdBlue®. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake Z Driving and parking Closing the AdBlue® filler cap 208 Parking Driving and parking boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied vehicles with manual transmission, engage first gear or reverse gear Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar object, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar object, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients Ron Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with manual transmission Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Apply the electric parking brake. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 181). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open one of the front doors or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P. Parking Switch the ignition on. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X With the Start/Stop button: Switch the ignition on. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it from rolling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake carries out a function check at regular intervals when the engine is switched off. Noises that occur are normal. Z Driving and parking If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: With the key: 209 Parking 210 Applying/releasing manually Rthere is a system malfunction power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Driving and parking Rthe Releasing automatically X To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. To release: pull handle :. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: X Rwhen the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button Applying automatically The electric parking brake is applied automatically: Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill (vehicles with automatic transmission) or Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary or Rif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehicle at a standstill In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position D or R RVehicles with manual transmission: a gear is engaged Rthe seat belt is fastened Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Vehicles with automatic transmission: when the transmission is in position R the boot lid must be closed. Vehicles with manual transmission: when reverse gear R is engaged, the boot lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: RVehicles Rthe driver's door is closed with automatic transmission: you are shifting from transmission position P or have previously driven faster than 3 km/h RVehicles with manual transmission: you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. RVehicles Driving tips Emergency braking Driving tips The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electrical parking brake (Y page 209). General driving tips Ra warning tone sounds Release park. brake message appears Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Rthe Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging and further damaged in the event of this occurring again. X Disconnect the battery or connect it to a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Hybrid vehicles: observe the safety notes for the high-voltage battery (Y page 269). Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: The tyres should always be inflated to the recommended tyre pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Service Booklet or by the service interval display. X Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. Z Driving and parking The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake depressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: 211 212 Driving tips The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: Driving and parking : Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): Rthe : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: sporty acceleration ; Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve fuel message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ?. In addition, the 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up (Y page 360). Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same Driving tips Rload Rtyre pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style involves driving at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories "acceleration" and "smooth driving": Robserve the gearshift recommendation the vehicle in drive program E (vehicles with the AGILITY SELECT switch) On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarises the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 299). Further information on the ECO display (Y page 298). Rdrive Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Z Driving and parking time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: 213 Driving and parking 214 Driving tips If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You will have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This can increase the braking distance considerably. RIn order to prevent a layer of salt forming, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. New brake discs and brake pads/ linings Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends only fitting the following brake discs and brake pads/linings: Rbrake discs that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality Other brake discs or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake discs and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Always fit new brake pads/linings when replacing brake discs. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake discs to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched. The use of brake discs other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz may alter track width and is subject to approval, if applicable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with lightweight brake discs. Avoid shocktype loads on the lightweight brake discs, particularly on the brake plate. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur: Rthe Rlower Ravoid your speed tyre ruts Driving tips sudden steering movements carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you must drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe water level, in the case of still water, may not exceed a maximum point of the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Further information on driving with snow chains (Y page 431). Further information on driving with summer tyres (Y page 430). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 430). Z Driving and parking Ravoid Rbrake 215 216 Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought-out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 74). for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads) Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and to call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. Driving systems The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: Storing and maintaining the current speed RLIM Selecting cruise control You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. i Vehicles with manual transmission: Ralways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds Rchange gear in good time. Rif possible, do not change down several gears at a time Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the Z Driving and parking indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In addition, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. In the speedometer, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. 217 Driving systems Driving and parking 218 vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. X Deactivating cruise control Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. or X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever is lit. Driving systems Ryou apply the electric parking brake are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rwhile driving a vehicle with manual transmission, you shift into neutral or depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, you shift into position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 221) i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. SPEEDTRONIC General notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and calling up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. Z Driving and parking Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: 219 220 Driving systems The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: Driving and parking RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. The speedometer dial lights up between the start of the scale and the stored speed. Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever is on. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Storing the current speed X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. Driving systems Setting a speed 221 Rdrive slower than the stored speed without kickdown a new speed or Rcall up the last speed stored again The SPEEDTRONIC passive message in the multifunction display disappears. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. or X X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. Switching SPEEDTRONIC to passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC is switched to passive mode. The following message appears in the multifunction display: SPEEDTRONIC passive. passive You can then exceed the stored speed. SPEEDTRONIC is activated again if you: There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 313). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Z Driving and parking Rset 222 Driving systems Driving and parking You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly recognise other road users and complex traffic conditions. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be prepared to brake, particularly if DISTRONIC PLUS warns you. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and weather conditions or traffic conditions into account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle Driving systems in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Cruise control lever Rin Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed can: Rsnow Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Rbe To activate or increase speed To set the specified minimum distance LIM indicator lamp To activate at the current speed/last stored speed A To activate or reduce speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS : ; = ? You can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control lever indicates which function you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp = off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp = on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. Z Driving and parking road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: 223 Driving and parking 224 Driving systems If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors must be closed. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selected with the cruise control lever (Y page 223). Activating Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down = until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Driving systems 225 facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. There is a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ drive program (Y page 197). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or E drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. Changing lanes If you change to the overtaking lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/h switch on the respective turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. Ryou If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. X i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane (on left-handdrive vehicles) or the right lane (on righthand-drive vehicles). Z Driving and parking i The vehicle can also pull away when it is 226 Driving systems Road and traffic conditions Stopping Driving and parking G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere i The following function is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. The function is not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive around a roundabout a T-junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the speed you set. The system takes into account the fact that overtaking on the right is not permitted on motorways or high-speed major roads at speeds above 80 km/h. The driving speed is adjusted to the speed of the queue of vehicles in the adjacent lane to the left. Rapproach i Prevention of overtaking on the right applies to countries where traffic drives on the right. In countries where traffic drives on the left, overtaking on the left is prevented accordingly. is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 228). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Driving systems system fault occurs power supply is insufficient If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Rthe Setting a speed Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 228). i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Z Driving and parking Ra 227 228 Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster Driving and parking Displays in the speedometer If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments between the speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed ; light up. The segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 306). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated : DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 307) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 306). You will see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 307) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. Driving systems X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards : or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend RVehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane vehicles changing lane RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. ROther Cornering, entering and exiting a bend i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle has skidded Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their Z Driving and parking There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: 229 230 Driving systems lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Driving and parking Other vehicles changing lane DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot General notes DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the centre of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in a speed range from 0 - 200 km/h. It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windscreen. Driving systems Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the carriageway, your vehicle could come into contact with the kerb or other road boundaries. In the case of deviations in road markings, beware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane switch on the turn signal Ryou take your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time Ryou i After you have finished changing lanes, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance: Ron very sharp corners towing a trailer Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed Rwhen Z Driving and parking At speeds of more than 60 km/h Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings (left and right). In a speed range from 0 - 60 km/h Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. If these conditions are not present, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. 231 Driving systems Driving and parking 232 Also observe the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot switch to passive mode. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Information in the multifunction display If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but is not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in grey. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: steering assist. offmessage off appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+: steering assist. onmessage on appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Driving systems Activating the HOLD function G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released RVehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. The HOLD function is then deactivated. Z Driving and parking Important safety notes 233 234 Driving systems The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated and: Driving and parking Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient Vehicles with automatic transmission: if a fault occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Vehicles with manual transmission: The Brake immediately message can also appear in the multifunction display. X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. The HOLD function is deactivated. A horn will sound at regular intervals if you turn off the engine, take off your seat belt or open the driver's door when the HOLD function is activated. The horn alerts you to the fact that the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. i Once you have switched off the engine, option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and the Adaptive Damping System ADS. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle level can be set using the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 197) or the level button (Y page 234). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function. Vehicles with manual transmission: the vehicle level can be set using the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 191) or the level button (Y page 234). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function. Important safety notes G WARNING People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres when the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches. i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not lowered. Vehicle level Setting the raised vehicle level you cannot restart it until you have deactivated the HOLD function. AIRMATIC General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of 80 km/h. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 25 mm compared to the normal level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further. The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: X Rdrive faster than 120 km/h for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h. The "Raised level" remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Rdrive Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the currently selected drive program (Y page 197). Suspension setting General notes The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sport or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Rthe Sport mode In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs, the firmer suspension setting ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: select the S or S+ drive program with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 197). Vehicles with manual transmission: select the S or S+ drive program with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 191). The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level. Comfort mode In the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select Comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: select the E or C drive program with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 197). Vehicles with manual transmission: select the E or C drive program with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 191). The vehicle is raised to the normal level. When driving at speeds above 125 km/h, the vehicle is automatically lowered by 15 mm in the E and C drive programs. When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again. 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor Z 235 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 236 Driving systems override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in the lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary Raccelerate less when driving ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Rshift Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles Driving systems 237 Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 401). Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational readiness indicator = lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling deterZ Driving and parking Rear sensors 238 Driving systems Driving and parking mine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Vehicles without AIRMATIC One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Vehicles with AIRMATIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. : To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving systems 239 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactivated. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 401). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 236). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the manoeuvring range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. For vehicles with the trailer tow hitch folded out, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly longer. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a Z Driving and parking Problem 240 Driving systems sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Driving and parking Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rparking or stopping prohibitions Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Runsuitable surfaces Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 237) warning messages during the parking procedure. Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces that are: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Ron Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and switch off Active Parking Assist. Rthe Further information on the detection range (Y page 236). Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb Ryou forward park Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a kerb system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to manoeuvre into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Rthe : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel are parallel to the direction of travel and are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle Rthat driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion: if PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time. i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the length of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit in the parking space. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The Start Park Assist?Yes: OKNo: % message appears in the multifunction display . X Z 241 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 242 X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. Driving and parking or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brakeObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Park Assist active Select DObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage forward gearObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to first gear while the vehicle is stationary. Vehicles with automatic transmission: select transmission position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brakeObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the front border of the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Park Assist active Select RObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park Assist active Engage reverse gearObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A kerb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is manoeuvred into the parking space. Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. Start the engine. Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position D or R. X X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to forward or reverse gear. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Vehicles with manual transmission: depending on the message or as required, engage forward or reverse gear. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist switched off message Z 243 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 244 appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognise that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Reversing camera General notes Cancelling Active Parking Assist X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 238). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is applied position P is selected in vehicles with automatic transmission Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist cancelled message. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator pedal again. Rtransmission Reversing camera : is in the boot lid handle. Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guidelines in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. i The text shown in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera messages in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display. Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the boot lid is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rin Driving systems Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 401) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in Audio 20/ COMAND Online; see the Digital Owner's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The reversing camera flap opens. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display. The image from the reversing camera is available throughout the manoeuvring process. i The reversing camera is protected from X raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the reversing camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the manoeuvring proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine open the boot Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 401). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the reversing camera has been deactivated. Ryou Activating/deactivating the reversing camera 245 To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the Audio 20/COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer". The symbol of the selected function is highlighted. Further information on the Audio 20/ COMAND controller, see the Digital Owner's Manual. To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Messages in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle Runder ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe Z Driving and parking X 246 Driving systems Rthe rear section of an HGV slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Driving and parking Ra The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 237), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. Driving systems Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 245). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. X Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle Driving and parking "Reverse parking" function 247 : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 245). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. X : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Z Driving systems 248 Driving and parking X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. "Coupling up a trailer" function : Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel = End of parking space X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line : is then at the end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling ; Trailer drawbar locating aid = Trailer drawbar ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function A Ball coupling Driving systems Wide-angle function Object detection The reversing camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some distance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Object detection only works in full screen mode. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in Audio 20/COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. 360° camera (surround view) General notes The 360° camera is a camera system that consists of four cameras. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: Rreversing camera camera Rtwo cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. You can show pictures from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in seven different splitscreen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The seven split-screen views are: Rtop view and image from the reversing camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rfront : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the reversing camera to select a wide-angle view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 237), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display in yellow or red respectively. Z Driving and parking Select symbol ? using the Audio 20/ COMAND controller, see the Audio 20/ COMAND Online operating instructions. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar locating aid ; points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar =. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = reaches red guide line. The distance between the trailer drawbar and the red guide line is now approximately 0.30 m. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 284). X 249 250 Driving systems Rtop view and enlarged front view view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer tow hitch) Rtop view and images from the rear-facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and images from the forwardfacing mirror cameras (front wheel view) When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the guidelines in the COMAND display are hidden. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Driving and parking Rtop Important safety notes The 360° camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360° camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for safe manoeuvring and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function only in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the boot lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses mist up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered the vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You could otherwise injure others or damage objects when parking the vehicle. Guide lines are always shown at road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling. The camera in the rear area is protected by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360° camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 401). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360° camera has been deactivated. Rif Activation conditions The 360° camera image can be displayed if: RCOMAND Online/Audio 20 is switched on, see the Digital Owner's Manual Rthe 360° camera function is switched on i If the 360° camera is activated at speeds above 30 km/h, a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Rthe vehicle's speed falls below 30 km/h. The 360° camera is then activated. message is confirmed with the % button. Rthe Driving systems X Press button :. The following appears depending on whether transmission position D or R is selected: Rfull-screen view with image from the front camera Rfull-screen view with image from the reversing camera i You can also switch to the split-screen view from the full-screen view. Activating the 360° camera using COMAND Online X To select 360° camera in the carousel menu: turn and press the controller. The following appears depending on whether transmission position D or R is selected: Ra split-screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split-screen with top view and the image from the reversing camera Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear You can show images from the 360° camera automatically by engaging reverse gear. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND Online, see the Digital Owner's Manual. X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the reversing camera. X Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays Switching between split screen views: To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide Z V the controller. X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. X Switching to full screen mode: X 180° view Turn and press the controller. i The full screen option is only available in the following views: RTop view with image from the reversing camera RTop view with image from the front camera Displays in the COMAND display Important safety notes The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers close to the front and rear bumpers Rin the area immediately above the handle on the boot lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view Rvery Z Driving and parking Activating the 360° camera using the function button 251 252 Driving systems ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Driving and parking Rthe Top view with image from the reversing camera B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Top view with image from the front camera : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and reversing camera image = Guide line for the maximum steering angle ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems imately 0.30 m from the front of the vehicle B Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle Top view with image from the mirror cameras Driving and parking A Red guide line at a distance of approx- Top view and enlarged rear view : Symbol for the top view and forward- facing mirror camera setting ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and reversing camera image enlarged ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you. i This setting can also be selected as an 253 including the exterior mirror (right side of vehicle) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirror (left side of vehicle) i You can also select the mirror camera setting for the rear-facing view. "Coupling up a trailer" function enlarged front view. : Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar = Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Z Driving systems 254 Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. Driving and parking X Wide-angle function : Symbol for the full-screen setting with the reversing camera image : ; = ? Symbol for the trailer view setting Trailer drawbar locating aid Ball coupling Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the ball coupling Select symbol : using the COMAND controller; see the COMAND Online operating instructions. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure trailer drawbar locating aid ; points approximately in the direction of the trailer drawbar. X Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbar reaches red guide line ?. The distance between the trailer drawbar and the red guide line is now approximately 0.30 m. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 284). X The lines are shown at the level of the trailer coupling. ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC and the function is activated (Y page 238), warning displays = in the COMAND display are also active or light up accordingly. PARKTRONIC appears as follows: Ras red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in top view in split-screen mode or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode i Full-screen mode can also be selected as front view. Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. i To select split-screen view, select the % symbol in the display, then confirm with the COMAND controller. Object detection The 360° camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle, other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some distance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Driving systems Stopping the 360° camera display As soon as the vehicle exceeds a speed of 30 km/h, the function switches off. The view which was active before the 360° camera was displayed appears in the COMAND display. You can also stop the 360° camera display from split-screen view by selecting the % symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the 360° camera display is also ended if you select transmission position P. Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Ryou switch off the engine take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Ryou Displaying the attention level ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 307) of the on-board computer. X Select the assistance graphics display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 306). The following information is displayed: Rthe length of the journey since the last break Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Attention level), level dis- Z Driving and parking Object detection only functions in both fullscreen modes. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). 255 Driving systems Driving and parking 256 played in a bar display in five levels from high to low RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System suspendedmessage suspended appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h. Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 309). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Selection Standard Standard: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Selection Sensitive Sensitive: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a break!. break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND. Traffic Sign Assist General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted and overtaking restrictions to the driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction triggers a warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with camera system : attached behind the top of the windscreen. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are also used to determine the current speed limit. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits and overtaking restrictions is updated. Driving systems Rthe vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorway exit or slip road) Ra village or town boundary is passed which is stored in the digital map Rthe last traffic sign detected by the camera has not been repeated If a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the sign is displayed for five seconds. The applicable traffic regulation then appears in the instrument cluster. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions). The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either. always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if: Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rthere is dirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the vicinity of the camera Rtraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice, snow) Rthe traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night Rsigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes) Rthe information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date Activating Traffic Sign Assist X Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display using the on-board computer (Y page 308). If you have activated the display of Traffic Sign Assist in the on-board computer, the traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions) are displayed in the instrument cluster. The wrong-way warning remains active even when the display has been deactivated. Instrument cluster display Speed limit with overtaking restriction Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, display : is shown in the speedometer. Important safety notes Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits and overtaking restrictions. Traffic signs Z Driving and parking The display can also be updated without a visible traffic sign if: 257 258 Driving systems A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h (60 mph) : and an overtaking restriction ; apply. Cancelling the overtaking restriction Driving and parking Speed limit with unknown restriction : Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h (60 mph) : applies. The overtaking restriction no longer applies ;. The crossed-out no overtaking traffic sign is displayed for five seconds. End of a speed limit A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. Speed limits in wet conditions No speed limit : applies here. i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) : Maximum permitted speed ; Additional signs for wet conditions A maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (80 mph) applies in wet conditions and when Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the restriction must be observed. depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum permitted speed. Driving systems No entry (wrong-way warning) 259 Important safety notes Rovertaken If no entry signs or roundabout signs are passed, warning message : is displayed in the instrument cluster if Traffic Sign Assist detects that you are driving in the wrong direction. You will then also hear a warning tone. You should immediately check your direction of travel in order to avoid danger to yourself and other road users. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 259) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 261). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rwhen the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Monitoring range In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rvery wide lanes Rnarrow lanes Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane Rbarriers or other road boundaries Rpoor Z Driving and parking G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: 260 Driving systems Driving and parking Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Warning display : Warning display Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Driving systems Lane Keeping Assist General notes Display in the assistance graphic When Blind Spot Assist is activated, grey radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 30 km/h, the colour of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Towing a trailer If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera : at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Z Driving and parking Activating Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (Y page 309) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red until the engine is started. 261 262 Driving systems Driving and parking Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road Activating Lane Keeping Assist Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist onmessage on appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, there may be a warning. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic display (Y page 306) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist offmessage off appears in the multifunction display. X Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting In the Assistance menu on the on-board computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 309). X Select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Standard When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Driving Assistance PLUS package General notes The Active Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 263) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 266). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of side impact is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a course-correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forwardfacing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaking too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rif the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer function properly. Z 263 Driving and parking Driving systems 264 Driving systems Monitoring range Driving and parking G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time Warning display : Warning display Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of vehicles may be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Rpoor Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning lamp always lights up when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, grey radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 30 km/h, the colour of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A coursecorrecting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds Ryou clearly brake or accelerate Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake RESP® is deactivated Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected Z 265 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 266 Activating Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 309). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Grey radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Driving and parking X Towing a trailer If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The radar waves next to the vehicle are hidden in the assistance display. The Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. If you select km in the Display unit Speed-/odometer: function on the on-board computer (Y page 312), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognise traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windscreen. Various areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rif the radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator grille are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration through the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is intended to help you return the vehicle to the original lane. G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognised as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must have been issued by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. Z 267 Driving and parking Driving systems 268 Driving systems No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou Driving and parking clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend Ryou have switched on the turn signal Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration RESP® is deactivated Rthe transmission is not in position D Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction switch on the turn signal Ryou clearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ryou Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Rlane markings are no longer detected Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist onmessage on appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering intervention may be made. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic display (Y page 306) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist offmessage off appears in the multifunction display. X Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting In the Assistance menu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist function (Y page 309). X Select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: X Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Towing a trailer If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Hybrid operation Points to remember General notes Hybrid technology combines a fuel efficient internal combustion engine with a powerful electric motor. The hybrid system automatically selects the most efficient operating mode for every driving situation. Drive the vehicle in the usual manner. To save fuel, the hybrid system switches off the combustion engine as often as possible during the journey when power output requirements are low. When power output requirements are low, the electric motor powers the vehicle. When power output requirements are high, the combustion engine is switched on, even during a journey. When the vehicle is stationary, the combustion engine is usually switched off. Consequently, there is usually no engine idling as with combustion engine vehicles. For pulling away and accelerating, the electric motor supports the internal combustion engine using the power stored in the highvoltage battery. In addition, the power is used for partially electric driving, operation of the electric coolant compressor and to support the 12 V on-board electrical system. In this way the hybrid drive helps to reduce your vehicle's fuel consumption. Observe the driving tips on hybrid operation (Y page 278). RBS (Recuperative Brake System) If you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation is initiated. The electric motor is operated as a generator when in overrun mode and when you brake. Hybrid technology converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electricity and stores it in the high-voltage battery. Important safety notes All of the vehicle's systems remain active, if: Rthe vehicle is stationary, combustion engine is switched off and Rthe READY-indicator in the instrument cluster is lit. If you remove your foot from the brake pedal while in transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away automatically. Observe the notes on the READY display of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 279). Vehicles with an electric motor generate significantly less noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, in certain Rthe Z 269 Driving and parking Hybrid operation Driving and parking 270 Hybrid operation situations your vehicle may not be heard by other road users. This is the case, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably. Hybrid operation 271 Driving and parking Hybrid system overview : ; = ? A B C D E F Recuperative Brake System 12 V battery High-voltage battery Electric cables for the high-voltage electrical system High-voltage battery cooling Electric refrigerant compressor Power electronics cooling Electric vacuum pump Transmission with electric motor Power electronics (DC/AC converter or DC/DC converter) You can deactivate the hybrid system manually. For further information on the high-voltage disconnect device, see (Y page 43). Z 272 Hybrid operation Driving and parking Instrument cluster : Charge level display for high-voltage battery (Y page 273) ; RBS warning lamp (Y page 362) = Electric motor power display (Y page 272) Displays and operation Electric motor power display Coolant temperature display for a combustion engine You can call up the coolant temperature using the on-board computer. X Use Ñ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select Coolant. Coolant The electric motor power display is on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster. The current charge level of the high-voltage battery is shown as a percentage in charge level display A. 100% corresponds to the highest possible charge level of the high-voltage battery. There are two further areas located to the left and right of charge level display A: RArea : to ; (E-DRIVE): Hybrid operation Operating the on-board computer You can display the current operating condition of the hybrid system in the multifunction display and the COMAND display (Y page 273). You can display the current operating condition of the hybrid system in the multifunction display and the Audio 20/COMAND Online display (Y page 273). In the Audio 20/COMAND Online display, you can also call up a graphic display of the fuel consumption and generated electricity (Y page 276). Menus and submenus Selecting messages in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display Press the Ø button on the controller. The vehicle menu appears. X To select Energy flow flow: turn and press the controller. The energy flow is displayed. X To select Consumption Consumption: turn and press the controller. Fuel consumption and the electric energy generated are displayed. X To exit the display: press the % button on the controller. X Selecting the energy flow display in the multifunction display Use Ñ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select Energy flow. flow The energy flow is displayed. X Energy flow display Overview : Internal combustion engine ; Electric motor = Charge status of the high-voltage battery Z Driving and parking This shows the electric output from the electric motor, e.g. when driving using the electric motor or in boost mode. When the motor is switched on, the display is at :. When driving solely on electricity, the display fills up from : to ; depending on the power output demanded as a result of pressing the accelerator pedal. If the display has reached limit ;, additional power output can only be provided by the combustion engine. The combustion engine starts. If the display is approaching limit ; and you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the display empties again. The combustion engine is not switched on. At low speeds, you can thereby control the electric drive usage so that you only drive in electric mode. RArea = to ? (CHARGE): This shows the recuperated energy which is stored in the high-voltage battery as electrical energy. When the display reaches limit ?, the maximum recuperative braking power has been exhausted. The conventional brakes are activated. 273 274 Hybrid operation Driving and parking ? High-voltage battery A Energy flow The active hybrid components are highlighted. The energy flow is indicated by arrows. The arrows have a different colour depending on the operating state: The combustion engine is running while the vehicle is stationary. The high-voltage battery is not being charged. The arrows for the energy flow are not shown. The combustion engine is highlighted. Charging while the vehicle is stationary RGreen: energy recuperation normal energy consumption RRed: increased energy consumption, provided by the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system RWhite: Automatic engine switch-off The internal combustion engine drives the electric motor. The electric motor is operating as an alternator. The high-voltage battery is charging. The arrow representing energy flow is shown in white. The internal combustion engine and the electric motor are switched off. The arrows for the energy flow are not shown. The combustion engine is shown in dark grey. The charge status of the high-voltage battery is shown when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving using the internal combustion engine Engine running while the vehicle is stationary The internal combustion engine powers the vehicle. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in white. Hybrid operation If you rapidly depress the accelerator, the electric motor supports the internal combustion engine by providing additional torque. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in red. Driving using the internal combustion engine and energy recuperation Driving using the internal combustion engine and charging the high-voltage battery The internal combustion engine powers the vehicle. The internal combustion engine also drives the electric motor. The electric motor is operating as an alternator. The high-voltage battery is charging. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in white. Driving using the electric motor The internal combustion engine powers the vehicle. The electric motor is being operated as an alternator, e.g. in overrun mode and when braking (Y page 279). The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electrical energy. The high-voltage battery is charging. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in green. The electric motor powers the vehicle. The high-voltage battery supplies the electric motor with electrical energy. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in green. Z Driving and parking Driving using the internal combustion engine and boost mode 275 276 Hybrid operation Driving and parking Driving using the electric motor and charging the high-voltage battery The electric motor is being operated as an alternator, e.g. in overrun mode and when braking. The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electrical energy. The highvoltage battery is charging. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in green. The combustion engine is shown in dark grey. Displaying the total range Displaying fuel consumption and generated electrical energy : Fuel consumption ; Electrical energy generated Every bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute. Fuel consumption indicator : may differ from the indicator in the From start trip computer in the Trip menu. To reset values: the values are reset along with the From start trip computer (Y page 299). X To select Consumption Consumption: turn and press the controller. The Audio 20/COMAND Online display shows fuel consumption : and electrical energy generated ; for the last 15 minutes driven. Starting the engine READY indicator The approximate range is based on the current driving style. X Use Ñ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the approximate total range. X X Switch the ignition on. Depress the brake pedal. Hybrid operation Noiseless start The vehicle starts in electric mode without the internal combustion engine. The internal combustion engine starts only after the power demanded by the driver exceeds the available power that the electric motor can currently provide. Noiseless start operation is dependent on the outside temperature and the operating temperature of the internal combustion engine. The vehicle is operational when READY indicator : lights up. Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 279) Rthe climate control settings - THERMATIC (Y page 153) - THERMOTRONIC (Y page 156) Rthe rear window heating operation period (Y page 164) Rthe performance of the seat heating (Y page 123) If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. Pulling away Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Further information on pulling away (Y page 184). Driving AGILITY SELECT switch Driving programs Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering X Push AGILITY SELECT switch : up or down until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the Audio 20/ COMAND Online display. Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings S+ Sport Plus RExtremely sporty driving style with boost mode RElectric-only drive is not possible ECO start/stop function is not available RThe Z Driving and parking Observe the notes on starting the engine (Y page 183). X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 183) or press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 184). The vehicle is operational when READY indicator : lights up. X 277 Hybrid operation 278 S Sport boost mode Driving and parking RElectric-only drive is not possible RThe ECO start/stop function is not available C Comfort E Eco RComfortable, economical driving style RElectric-only drive is possible RThe ECO start/stop function is available RParticularly economical driving style RElectric operation mode is used as often as possible RThe ECO start/stop function is available Additional information for drive programs (Y page 197). Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can temporarily change gear yourself. Further information on the manual drive program (Y page 278). Manual gearshifting Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, you can temporarily change gear yourself. The transmission must be in position D. Electric-only operation is not possible when manually changing gear. Activating when driving with the electric motor: X ing is not active switches to overrun mode (Y page 280). RSporty driving style with Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198). The combustion engine is switched on. Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. Pulling on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle when manual gear chang- Activating when driving with the combustion engine: X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198). Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. The ECO start/stop function is not available when manually changing gear. Further information on the manual drive program (Y page 198). Driving tips General driving tips Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent and sudden acceleration as well as abrupt braking. During partially electric driving, pulling away and acceleration, the electric motor supports the internal combustion engine. During overrun in transmission position D and braking, the electric motor operates as an alternator. To reduce fuel consumption, use: Rrecuperative braking (Y page 269) mode (Y page 280) or extended overrun mode (Y page 280) For further information on the ECO start/stop function; see (Y page 279). Additional driving tips (Y page 211). Roverrun Stationary vehicle If the vehicle is stopped, the combustion engine is, for the most part, switched off. Automatic climate control continues to function. The electro-mechanically assisted steering gear allows use of the power steering without loss of comfort. Hybrid operation Rentirely by electric propulsion Rin combination with the internal combustion engine When accelerating at an increased or full load, boost mode is utilised. The electric motor supports the internal combustion engine by providing additional torque when the accelerator is depressed rapidly. Overrun mode or braking There are three possible operating modes when the hybrid vehicle is decelerating: RWhen coasting and decelerating, energy recuperation is already taking place (Y page 269). The electric motor functions as an alternator and stores the recuperated energy in the high-voltage battery. RWhen braking gently, the electric motor increases the deceleration of the vehicle. Energy recuperation is increased (Y page 269). The electric motor functions as an alternator and stores the recuperated energy in the high-voltage battery. RDuring heavy braking, the service brake is also used to slow down the vehicle. Both systems work together. Driving in the city Energy is recuperated during frequent deceleration and stopping in city traffic. The vehicle can be driven by the electric motor alone up to a speed of approximately 35 km/h, e.g.: Rwhile approaching a traffic light stop-and-start traffic The vehicle is driven by the electric motor alone only when all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled. Further information on the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 280). Driving on inter-urban roads Three phases are possible when driving on inter-urban roads: Rrapid acceleration (boost mode) energy consumption Renergy recuperation Depending on the characteristics of the route, there may be a lot of recuperated energy available. This reduces consumption and emissions. Rconstant Driving on the motorway When driving on a motorway, the following have a particularly positive effect on fuel consumption and emissions: Rthe decrease in wasted power when using recuperative braking Rthe decrease in wasted power in overrun mode when the combustion engine is switched off Manoeuvring and turning The hybrid drive makes it possible to manoeuvre and turn solely using the electric motor. ECO start/stop function General notes The ECO start/stop function switches the internal combustion engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving and at high speeds (Y page 280). All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. the automatic climate control. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive programs C, E and I. Electric-only operation is only possible in drive programs C and E. Rin Z Driving and parking Acceleration Depending on the operating mode, pulling away and driving under low load conditions are performed: 279 280 Hybrid operation Automatic engine switch-off The internal combustion engine is switched off automatically if: has reached the lower limit settings of the automatic climate control require it, e.g. at external temperatures above 30 † Rthe Rthe Driving and parking driver removes his foot from the accelerator pedal and a speed of 160 km/h is not exceeded (Y page 280) Rthe combustion engine and the transmission have reached operating temperature Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened and the driver's door is closed Rthe driver only slightly depresses the accelerator pedal in order to, for example, maintain the current speed for a limited distance Rthe bonnet is closed and engaged properly Rthe high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently Rthere are no faults in the hybrid system The internal combustion engine will not be switched off automatically, if: Rthe charge level of the high-voltage battery Rthe self-diagnosis function of the engine control unit is still active Rthe climate control of the vehicle requires it Rthe high-voltage battery is being charged (Y page 274) Rautomatic emissions tests are running Rthe operating temperature of the engine, transmission and catalytic converter has not yet been reached Automatic engine start The internal combustion engine, which has been automatically switched-off, starts automatically in certain situations, when: Rthe power demand from the driver via the accelerator pedal is greater than the electric motor alone can provide Rthe driver switches to drive program S or S + Rthe driver has activated manual gearshifting Overrun mode This operating mode is available in the speed range below 160 km/h. The combustion engine is switched off and is disconnected from the drive train. The electric motor: Rsimulates an overrun torque which is equiv- alent to the overrun torque of the combustion engine Rfunctions as a generator and produces the necessary energy for the auxiliary consumers and charges the high-voltage battery Extended overrun mode Overrun mode allows you to increase the vehicle range. When the vehicle is in overrun operating mode: X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. Energy recuperation is reduced to the minimal amount of energy required. The vehicle rolls faster and further, e.g. on long and steep downhill gradients or while coasting towards a set of traffic lights. You can see the reduction in energy recuperation in the electric motor CHARGE display (Y page 272). The "extended overrun" operating mode is deactivated again if: Rthe Ryou combustion engine starts depress the brake pedal Hybrid operation 281 Parking Apply the electric parking brake. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the automatic transmission to P. X Switch the ignition off. The READY indicator in the instrument cluster goes out. Driving and parking X Further information on parking and switching off the internal combustion engine (Y page 208). Z 282 Hybrid operation Problems with hybrid operation Internal combustion engine Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot start the For example, the self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybrid internal combustion system is malfunctioning. engine. The multifunc- X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. tion display shows no X Try to start the internal combustion engine again. display messages. The If the internal combustion engine still does not start: READY indicator in the multifunction display is X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. off. You wish to pull away, The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicator but the ECO start/stop lamps in the instrument cluster light up. function does not start X Move the transmission selector lever to P. the internal combusX Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. tion engine. The READY X Start the engine. indicator in the multifunction display is off. The hybrid system is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hybrid system Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The hybrid system was You have been in an accident. deactivated automati- The hybrid system remains deactivated if: cally. Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a few seconds. Rthe red SRS warning lamp 6 in the instrument cluster is lit. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The hybrid system was An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid system or an deactivated automati- electrical connection has been disconnected. cally. The multifunction X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display also shows a display (Y page 314). display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination if it begins to swerve. The vehicle/trailer combination could even overturn. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten out the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing speed. Decrease your speed and do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. G WARNING If the maximum the permissible load for a carrier system is exceeded, the carrier could come loose from the vehicle and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never exceed the permissible noseweight when using a carrier. Exceeding the maximum permissible noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling may cause damage to the following: Ryour vehicle Rthe trailer Rthe ball coupling Rthe trailer tow hitch The vehicle/trailer combination could become unstable. If the noseweight used is lower than the minimum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/ trailer combination could also become unstable. To avoid hazardous situations: Rmake sure to check the noseweight before each journey. Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum noseweight. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible noseweight. Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the minimum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found: Rthe Rin your vehicle documents Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch and the trailer the vehicle identification plate If the values differ, the lowest value applies. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 478). Ron G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Z Driving and parking Towing a trailer 283 284 Towing a trailer ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Driving and parking results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle This can impair the vehicle's handling characteristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination. Ris Notes on towing a trailer General notes Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RC 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 220 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY Edition When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 432). RC On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. You will find fitting dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 477). When towing a trailer, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated. The è ECO symbol appears yellow in the multifunction display. For further information on the ECO start/stop function; see (Y page 186). Driving tips Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 82). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle (Y page 478). If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer and it will consume more fuel. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the Towing a trailer 285 Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side: Do not accelerate. Do not countersteer. X Brake if necessary. X X RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. X X RAvoid Open the boot lid. Pull release knob : until the ball coupling unlocks. The ball coupling folds out from under the rear bumper. The indicator lamp on the release knob flashes. The trailer socket folds away automatically. Folding out the ball coupling G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an accident. Always engage the ball coupling as described. G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. The indicator lamp on the release knob goes off. The multifunction display shows the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message until the ball coupling is engaged. X Remove the protective covering from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Hybrid vehicles: observe the safety instructions for hybrid vehicles (Y page 269). Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Towing a trailer 286 Coupling up a trailer Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Position the trailer horizontally behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electric connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. X Push the combination switch upwards/ downwards and check whether the corresponding turn signal on the trailer is flashing. A connected trailer is only recognised when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The functioning of other systems, e.g. ESP®, PARKTRONIC, Active Parking Assist, Active Blind Spot Assist or Lane Keeping Assist also depends on this. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. Driving and parking X Uncoupling a trailer G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. G WARNING Vehicles with level control: If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle is lowered. This can cause you or others to become trapped between the vehicle body and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This poses a risk of injury. Make sure that no-one is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. X Folding in the ball coupling G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the trailer cables are disconnected. X Place the protective covering on the ball coupling. X Open the boot lid. Towing a trailer 287 X Pull release knob : until the ball coupling unlocks. The ball coupling folds down from under the rear bumper. The indicator lamp on the release knob flashes. Do not attempt to speed this process up by applying additional pressure with your foot. The system could otherwise be mechanically damaged. When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can find more information about fitting the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop. X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0 respectively (Y page 181). Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly behind the bumper. The indicator lamp on the release knob goes out and the message in the multifunction display disappears. Trailer power supply ! You can connect accessories with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and with a power rating of up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an error message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message may be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA. To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General notes Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking The trailer battery may not be charged from the power supply. Towing a trailer 288 Fitting the adapter ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable Driving and parking play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. Open the socket cover. Insert the plug connector with lug : into groove = on the socket. Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X Towing a trailer 289 Problems with trailer towing Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The released ball coupling cannot be engaged. X Driving and parking Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The ball coupling does The on-board voltage is insufficient. not unlock, even X Start the engine. though: If the ball coupling still does not unlock: Rthe vehicle is stationX Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ary Rno trailer cable is connected Rthe release knob to unlock the ball coupling has been pulled for more than a second. Z 290 Useful information ............................ 292 Important safety notes ..................... 292 Displays and operation ..................... 292 Menus and submenus ...................... 297 Display messages ............................. 314 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 351 On-board computer and displays 291 On-board computer and displays 292 Displays and operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument cluster illustration (Y page 34). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using brightness control knob :. X Turn brightness control knob : up or down. If the light switch (Y page 137) is set to Ã, T or L the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 216): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated (Y page 219): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 222): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. The analogue coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 34). In the on-board computer in the Service menu there is a digital coolant temperature gauge (Y page 307). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 295). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Z 293 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 294 Operating the on-board computer 9 : Press and hold: RRapid scrolling in all lists the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open RIn : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Vehicles with manual transmission: if you remove the key then quickly re-insert it and turn to position 1, the on-board computer/ instrument cluster is not activated. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel ò RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up a main menu RScrolls through lists a menu or function RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects an audio track or video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number RSelects a all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources/media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialling the selected number ñ Switches off LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions % Press briefly: RIn RBack RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: dese- lects the track or station list or list of available radio sources/ media RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ~ RRejects or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 or accepts a call RSwitches to the redial memory W X RAdjusts RMakes the volume 8 RMute ó Switches on LINGUATRONIC, see the separate operating instructions Multifunction display Multifunction display (example: vehicles with automatic transmission) : Drive program (Y page 195) ; Transmission position (Y page 195) = Display panel for display messages, menus and menu lists ? Time A Outside temperature (Y page 293) B Additional speedometer (Y page 312) The unit displayed in additional speedometer B in the multifunction display is inverse to the speedometer unit in the instrument cluster. X To call up the menu list in display panel =: press the ò button on the steering wheel. Display panel = shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation, for manual transmission (Y page 191) or when shifting manually (automatic transmission) (Y page 198) XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 239) ¯ Cruise control (Y page 216) È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 219) READY indicator for the hybrid READY system (Y page 272) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS (Y page 139) è ECO start/stop function (Y page 186) ë HOLD function (Y page 232) a DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 230) 120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Head-up display General notes The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RNavigation RDISTRONIC PLUS control and SPEEDTRONIC RTraffic Sign Assist The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without having to take his eyes off the road. RCruise Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Z 295 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 296 Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are not always correctly displayed. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The visibility of the head-up display is influenced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position positioning of the display image Rthe general light conditions Rsunglasses with polarisation filters Rwet road surfaces Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again. Rthe i Vehicles with the head-up display are equipped with a special windscreen. Should repairs be necessary, have the windscreen replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation Switching the head-up display on/off X Press button :. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision. Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Head-up display Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display: : Navigation messages ; Current speed = Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 222) The selected cruise control speed (Y page 216) The selected SPEEDTRONIC speed (Y page 219) If Traffic Sign Assist is activated in the head-up display sub-menu, detected traffic signs are also shown in the display. In the Settings menu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options: RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 310) the position (Y page 310) RAdjusting the brightness (Y page 310) RSetting Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the ò button on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 294). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: 297 RMedia menu (Y page 302) menu (Y page 304) RAssistance graphic menu (Y page 306) RService menu (Y page 306) RSettings menu (Y page 307) RTelephone RTrip menu (Y page 298) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 300) RRadio menu (Y page 302) RNavi Z Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 298 Trip menu Standard display refuelled C instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. Information on the total electric range in hybrid vehicles can be found in the "Hybrid drive" section (Y page 276). ECO display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use the : or 9 button to select ECO DISPLAY. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. X Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 211). Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" : ; = ? Distance Duration Average speed Average fuel consumption Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select From start or From reset. reset X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 299). The From start trip computer is automatically reset if: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. Digital speedometer Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the digital speedometer. X Resetting values Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. X Z 299 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 300 Menus and submenus You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip meter R"From start" trip computer R"From reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation messages. Further information on navigation can be found in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Route guidance not active Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to the next destination Estimated arrival time Distance to the next change of direction Current road Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to the change of direction = Change-of-direction symbol ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white) A Possible lane (light grey) B Lane not recommended (dark grey) : Direction of travel ; Current road On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended B: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane A: you will be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane only. Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that. Change of direction with lane recommendation Change of direction without lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction Other status indicators of the navigation system leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. : Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew route... or Calculating route... A new route is calculated. RRoad not mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognised, e.g. off-road position. RNo route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO Z 301 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 302 Menus and submenus You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Radio menu Use : or 9 to select the waveband or station preset. X Press a to confirm the selection. X i You can store your stations in Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast- ing) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Media menu Changing the media source : ; = ? Waveband Station frequency with memory position Name of artist Name of track Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Currently selected station ; appears in the multifunction display. X To open the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station from the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station from the station list using rapid scrolling: press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X To select a waveband or station preset: press a briefly. You can change the media source and playback mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in the Media menu. You can change the media source and playback mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in the Media menu. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To open/close the media sources list: press a briefly. The list shows the following media sources, for example: Rdisc (CD/DVD) card (SD/SDHC) RMEDIA REGISTER RUSB storage device RBluetooth® audio device Rmemory Observe the additional information on media support and on media mode in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions. Audio player or audio media operation Press a to confirm. To open the track list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select next/previous track from the track list: briefly press : or 9. X To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the : or 9 button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. X X If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio drive or audio media, the multifunction display may display the following: Rtrack Rtrack number name Rartist Ralbum : Media source, e.g. name of USB memory ; = ? A stick Current track Name of artist Name of album Folder name The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Audio files from various audio players or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select audio player or data carrier: press a briefly, to open the list of media sources. X Use : or 9 to select the corresponding audio player or audio media. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Z 303 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 304 Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select DVD single drive or data carrier: press a briefly, to open the list of media sources. X Use : or 9 to select the corresponding DVD player or DVD media. X Press a to confirm. X To open the scene list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select the next or previous scene from the scene list: briefly press : or 9. X To select a scene from the scene list using rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 until desired scene : is reached. X Press a to confirm your selection. X TV operation Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select TV: press a briefly to open the list of media sources. X Use : or 9 to select TV. X Press a to confirm. X To open the channel list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a channel from the channel list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a channel from the channel list using rapid scrolling: press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X Press a to confirm your selection. X i You can store TV channels in COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. Telephone menu Introduction : Station frequency with memory position ; Programme information, e.g. the name of the film = Name of channel list The memory position is only displayed along with channel : if this has been stored. X Switch on COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone, see the separate telephone operating instructions. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 386). or Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio 20 or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron Accepting a call X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still accept a call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still reject or end a call. Dialling a number from the phone book Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the :, 9 or a button to switch to the phone book. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the : or 9 button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. X If someone calls you when you are in the Telephone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. Z 305 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 306 Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. X The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 228) RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 256) RDistance warning function and autonomous braking system of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 308) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 82) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 259) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 263) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 255) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 261) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 266) Service menu Introduction Assistance graphic menu Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Assistance graphic menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. X In the Service menu, you have the following options: RCalling up display messages in the message memory (Y page 314) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 437) RChecking the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 434) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 395) RDisplaying the coolant temperature (Y page 307) RDisplaying the AdBlue® level and range (Y page 307) (BlueTEC vehicles only) Displaying the coolant temperature The coolant temperature is also shown in the instrument cluster in the rev counter. Observe the notes on coolant temperature (Y page 293). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Coolant submenu. X Press a to confirm your selection. The coolant temperature is shown in a bar display. Displaying AdBlue® level and range This menu is only available in BlueTEC vehicles. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Select the AdBlue submenu using : or 9. X Press a to confirm your selection. The range and AdBlue® level appear in a bar graph in the multifunction display. Observe the information and notes on "Refuelling" (Y page 204). Settings menu Introduction In the Settings menu, you have the following options: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 307) RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 310) RChanging the light settings (Y page 311) RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 312) RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 313) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 313) Assistance submenu Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP® (Y page 80). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Z 307 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 308 Menus and submenus It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 80). X Start the engine. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select ESP. ESP X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to drive, ESP® is deactivated. Rin If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 357). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 315). Activating/deactivating the message display for Traffic Sign Assist X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Traffic Sign Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. When the display is activated, recognised traffic signs are displayed in the multifunction display for five seconds. X For further information about Traffic Sign Assist, see (Y page 256). Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use 9 or : to select Collision Prevention. Prevention X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance graphic menu. For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 77). Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. Brake X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the Assistance graphic menu in the multifunction display. X For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 82). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, grey radar waves propX agating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the Assistance graphic menu in the multifunction display. For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 259). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 263). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive Sensitive. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the Assis‐ tance graphic menu in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 255). Setting Lane Keeping Assist X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Assis‐ tance submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keep‐ ing Assist. Assist Z 309 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 310 Press a to confirm. The current selection Standard or Adap‐ tive is displayed. X To change the setting: press a again. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist; see (Y page 261). For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist; see (Y page 266). Head-up display submenu Switching other displays on/off This function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with Navigation and/or Traffic Sign Assist. In the on-board computer, you can select which contents are shown on the windscreen when the head-up display is activated (Y page 295). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Head-up display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 buttons to select Display content. content X Press a to confirm. Switching the Traffic Sign Assist display on/off X Press the a button to save the setting. When you activate the Traffic Sign Assist display, recognised traffic signs are shown on the windscreen when the headup display is activated. Switching the navigation messages display on/off Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: press : to select Navigation mes‐ sages. sages X Press the a button to save the setting. When you switch on the Navigation mes‐ sages display, navigation messages are shown on the windscreen when the headup display is activated. X For more information on navigation, see the separate operating instructions. Further information on Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 256). Setting the position You can adjust the position of the displayed contents on the windscreen. X Switch on the Head-up display (Y page 296). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Head-up display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use the : or 9 button to select the Position function. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Use the : or 9 button to set the position from Level +5 to Level -5. -5 X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the position of the head-up display as a single memory preset (Y page 130). Adjusting the brightness You can adjust the brightness of the displayed contents on the windscreen. Switch on the head-up display (Y page 296). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Head-up display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Brightness function. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to set the brightness from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5 (dark). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Light submenu Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intelligent Light System function. If the Intelligent Light System function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in white. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you activate the Intelligent Light System you activate the following functions: System, RMotorway mode RActive light function RCornering light function range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Inactive for leftside traffic or Inactive for rightside traffic display message instead of the Intelligent Light System function in the Lights submenu (Y page 311). This display message will only appear if the setting for driving on the left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version. Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 138). RExtended Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 134). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped beams Setting for function. You will see the selected setting: rightside traffic or left-side traffic. traffic X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. These are only deactivated if the setting for driving on the left/right is set opposite to your vehicle's country version. Z 311 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 312 Menus and submenus A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right. Instrument cluster submenu Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles in the multifunction display. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or Miles. Miles X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rtotal Selecting the permanent display function Using the Permanent display function you can enable outside temperature and additional speedometer displays in the status area of the multifunction display. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐ nent display function. X Press a to confirm. The current selection Outside tempera‐ ture or Additional speedometer is displayed. X To change the setting: press a again. X Switching the additional speedometer on/off United Kingdom only: The speed is shown continuously in mph as a digital display in the status area. The additional speedometer cannot be switched on or off. Use the Digital speedo function to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display shows the speed digitally. The unit in the additional speedometer is always inverse to the speedometer unit. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use : or 9 to select the Digital speedo function. The current selection is displayed. X To switch on/off: press the a button again. Vehicle submenu Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Limit speed (winter tyres) function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (240 240 km/h to 160 km/h). km/h The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. For further information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 221). Restoring the factory settings Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory settings submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X Z 313 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Display messages On-board computer and displays 314 Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 232) page 207) RParking (Y Hides display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, you will see No messages in the multifunction display. If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages. X X Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist System), PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps may also light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Z 315 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 316 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 317 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 318 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. J Brake immediately A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function is active. or With the HOLD function activated, you have: Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). You can restart the engine. Rswitched ! Release parking brake The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 209). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 209). ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 209). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 319 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 320 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 439). X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 209). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 209). ! The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake Parking brake inop‐ has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. erative The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 321 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 322 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red ! indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Switch the ignition on. J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the parking brake Check brake fluid level G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. # Check brake pad wear Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Restart the engine. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus inoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Restart the engine. X PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Own‐ er's Manual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS might also be deactivated. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 323 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 324 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: RPRE-SAFE® PLUS Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS Possible causes: RPRE-SAFE® Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. All driving systems/driving safety systems are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors (Y page 401) in the following locations: Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. X ü If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 50). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ý If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 49). Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 50). 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Restraint sys. mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on the restraint system (Y page 44). 6 The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument Front left malfunc‐ cluster. tion Consult work‐ G WARNING shoporFront shop Front right malfunction Con‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintensult workshop tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shoporRear shop Rear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 325 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 326 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The rear centre restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear centre mal‐ function Consult workshop 6 G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a malfunction in the left or right windowbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Left windowbag mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshoporRight workshop Right The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally windowbag malfunc‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. tion Consult work‐ This poses an increased risk of injury. shop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag is disabled during the journey although: Ran adult or person larger than a certain size is occupying the frontpassenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. Ra G WARNING The front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of the vehicle. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the frontpassenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 54). Rthe display messages Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger airbag disa‐ bled See Owner's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic frontZ 327 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 328 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions passenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 54). Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag is enabled during the journey although: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. G WARNING The airbag may deploy unintentionally. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure there are no objects applying additional force to the seat. The system may otherwise detect the additional force and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the frontpassenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rthe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 54). Rthe display messages Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual or Front-passenger airbag disa‐ bled See Owner's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 54). Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 142). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. Left cornering light or Right cor‐ nering light Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam Trailer left tail lamporTrailer lamp Trailer right tail lamp Z 329 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 330 Display messages Display messages b Trailer left indi‐ catororTrailer cator Trailer right indicator b Trailer brake lamp b Rear left indica‐ tor or Rear right indicator b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. X The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 142). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 142). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tor or Right mir‐ ror indicator b The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The third brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left brake lamp or Right brake lamp Third brake lamp Left-hand tail lamp/ brake lamporRight-hand lamp Right-hand tail lamp/ brake lamp Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left tail lamp or Right tail lamp b Left main beamorRight beam Right main beam The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 142). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 142). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Number plate lamp Rear fog lamp Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp Reversing light Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp b Active Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative The active light function is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 331 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 332 Display messages Display messages b Malfunction See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The exterior lighting is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Check the fuses (Y page 424). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Switch off lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoper‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ative Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, display message Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 393). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Z 333 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 334 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: See Owner's Manual Rfaulty alternator power electronics (hybrid vehicles) Rtorn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Rdefective ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Observe the instructions in the # See Owner's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating and interior lighting. X Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance. The battery charges. Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Start engine See Owner's Manual Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the engine oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 392). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 392). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 Display message only for AMG vehicles: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Add 1 litre engine oil when next refu‐ X Check the engine oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 392). elling X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 392). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 392). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 392). 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. C There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off Reserve fuel level X Z 335 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 336 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone also sounds. X Refill AdBlue No start in ... mi Refill AdBlue® as soon as possible (Y page 204). The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A warning tone also sounds. Refill AdBlue® immediately (Y page 204). i If you drive the vehicle faster than 15 km/h the Refill AdBlue No start in ... mi message goes out after approximately one minute. X Refill AdBlue Eng. start not possible The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. Add at least 3.5 l of AdBlue® (Y page 204). Turn the ignition on for approximately one minute. The system requires approximately one minute after refilling to detect the change in the AdBlue® level. X Start the engine. X X Check AdBlue See Owner’s Manual The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Eng. start not pos‐ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sible sounds. You can no longer start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Hybrid system Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Û The hybrid system is malfunctioning. X Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or towed with the rear axle raised to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. d The drive system is malfunctioning. The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning. The drive power is restricted. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction Malfunction Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À Attention Assist inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ¨ Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. ¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle rising Vehicle rising Please wait Stop vehicle Vehi‐ cle too low Z 337 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 338 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too great. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ¨ The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Malfunction Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere are no lane markings for a long or extended period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Clean the windscreen. X Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ tive or Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Restart the engine. X Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist not available when tow‐ ing a trailer See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open. led X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed. You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 239). Z 339 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 340 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist inoper‐ PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. ative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 239). If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol is not shown in the multifunction display): X Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist inoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 232). Off The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 232). DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 222). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. rently unavailable DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are also temSee Owner's Manual porarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist Brake RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. RPRE-SAFE® DISTRONIC PLUS sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. pended X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222). DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph X DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 341 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 342 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DTR+: steering assist. currently unavailable See Owner's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere are no lane markings for a long or extended period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Clean the windscreen. X DTR+: steering assistant inopera‐ tive DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are malfunctioning. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. SPEEDTRONIC Limit - - - mph While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. Cruise control - - - mph A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 216). 120 km/h! Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!. km/h! X Drive more slowly. Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres tyre pressure in one or more tyres is not correct Rthe G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 408). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 437). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 437). The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 343 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 344 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rectify tyre pres‐ sure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 433). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 435). Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 408). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 433). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 408). Ryou Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. moni‐ tor currently unavailable Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Depress the brake pedal. Z 345 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 346 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of vehicle rolling Transmis‐ sion not in P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. Without changing gear, consult work‐ A warning tone also sounds. shop If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away Engage/disengage clutch quickly if req. The clutch is under considerable load and the permitted operating temperature has been exceeded. A warning tone also sounds. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Leave the engine running. The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running. or X If possible, continue driving at a steady speed. X Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow the clutch to slip. The clutch may also cool down during the journey. It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutch has cooled down, the display message disappears. The clutch is fully operational again. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. M The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Close the bonnet. Active bonnet mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction or because it has already been triggered. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. _ Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. X Push the backrest back until it engages. _ Saloon with through-loading facility in the rear compartment: The centre rear seat backrest is not engaged. X Push the backrest back until it engages. j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position (Y page 285). Rear left seat backrest not locked or Rear right seat back‐ rest not locked Rear centre back‐ rest not locked Check trailer hitch lock Z 347 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 348 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & Hybrid vehicles: with the engine switched off, you have attempted to switch on the pre-entry climate control more than twice. X Let the engine run for ten seconds. After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is operational again. Pre-entry climate control (via key) available again after engine start & Hybrid vehicles: the on-board voltage is too low. The pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. Pre-entry climate X Drive for a considerable distance. control (via key) The battery charges. The pre-entry climate control is operational inoperative HV bat‐ again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suftery low ficient. & Vehicles with BlueEFFICIENCY package: you have attempted to switch on the pre-entry climate control (eHeat/eVent) more than 3 times with the engine switched off. X Let the engine run for ten seconds. After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is operational again. & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating (Y page 172) has switched itself off. The auxiliary heating or pre-entry climate control (eHeat/eVent) cannot be switched on. X Drive for a considerable distance. The battery charges. The auxiliary heating or the auxiliary climate control ("eHeat/eVent" function) is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. & There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 172). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. & The auxiliary heating is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 172). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Function available again after engine start inoperative Bat‐ tery low inoperative Refuel vehicle inoperative See Owner's Man. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Ð The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. Power steering mal‐ G WARNING function See Own‐ er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Steering malfunc‐ tion See Owner's Manual G WARNING The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Do not drive on and consult the nearest qualified specialist workshop. _ The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Before starting X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly. the engine, turn the steering wheel. X Insert the key into the ignition lock again. Telephone No ser‐ vice Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 394). Z 349 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 350 Display messages Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key.  The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  The key batteries are discharged. X Replace the batteries (Y page 94).  The key is currently undetected. X Change the location of the key in the vehicle. Key does not belong to vehicle Replace key Change key batter‐ ies Key not detected (white display message)  Key not detected (red display message) If the key still cannot be detected: X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. The key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Locate the key. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.  Remove starting button, then insert key The key is continually undetected. The key detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). The warning tone ceases. Z 351 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 352 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. Hybrid vehicle: the yellow brake system warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. G WARNING The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Hybrid vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Z 353 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 354 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Hybrid vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. A warning tone also sounds. There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) has been deactivated due to a fault. Therefore BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. Z 355 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 356 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J÷ å! N The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. Hybrid vehicle: The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are shown in driving condition READY. ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a fault. Therefore BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, crosswind driving assistance, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 81), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 80). Z 357 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 358 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ESP® warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ESP® warning lamp is shown in driving condition READY. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 81), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 80). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the restraint system (Y page 44). Z 359 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 360 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Engine Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a fault, for example: Rin the engine management the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 203). Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. X 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp is on while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the bar display. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 393). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). Z 361 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 362 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 393). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Hybrid system Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J N The yellow RBS (Recuperative Brake System) warning lamp is on. In addition, a warning tone may sound. G Risk of accident RBS is malfunctioning. The automatic engine switch-off function may also be deactivated. X Observe the messages in the multifunction display (Y page 314). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J N The red brake warning lamp is on. A warning tone also sounds. G Risk of accident RBS is malfunctioning. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. X Increase the distance. · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 82). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 77). Z 363 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 364 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Tyres Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 408). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 433). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rthe h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Z 365 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 366 367 Useful information ............................ 368 Stowage areas ................................... 368 Stowing and features Features ............................................. 376 368 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. Never drive with the boot lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rthe boot is the preferred place to carry objects. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets. Stowage areas lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368). To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anticlockwise to position 1. X Spectacles compartment Front stowage compartments Glove compartment To open: press marking :. The spectacles compartment opens downwards. X To close: press marking : again and the spectacles compartment returns upwards and engages. X To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example, can be stored in the glove compartment. For vehicles with a perfume atomiser (Y page 167) the storage space of the glove compartment is restricted. The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the front centre console Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Z Stowing and features RClose 369 Stowage areas 370 Stowage compartment in the doors Rear stowage compartments Stowing and features Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest You can store items such as a rolled-up fluorescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle document wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage compartment : in the doors. Bottles with a capacity of up to 1.0 l may be stored in doors ;. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest X X To open: fold down the seat armrest. Press on the front of release catch : and fold the cover of the armrest upwards. Additional stowage space Depending on the equipment, the following additional stowage areas are available in the vehicle: Rcard X To open: press button : at the front. The stowage space opens. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space: Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports and an SD card slot, e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player, see the separate operating instructions Ra mobile phone bracket Ra small stowage space in the upper front section and coin holder in the dashboard above the light switch (not suitable for holding thin objects such as shopping tokens) Rthe open stowage compartment in the centre console Rstowage net in the front-passenger footwell Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's and front-passenger seat Rthe luggage nets on the left and right-hand side in the boot Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 368). Stowage areas Important safety notes X X G WARNING The skibag in conjunction with the lashing straps cannot restrain any objects other than skis. Vehicle occupants could be struck in the event of sudden braking or an accident, for instance, if you: other heavy or sharp-edged objects in the skibag Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing straps There is a risk of accident and injury. Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure the skibag with the lashing straps so that it cannot move around. Close the ski/snowboard bag. Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end until the skis or snowboards are held firmly inside the ski/snowboard bag. Rtransport A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snowboards can be transported in the ski/snowboard bag. Securing the ski/snowboard bag in the boot Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 372). X Slide the ski/snowboard bag between the two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure that the wheels of the ski/snowboard bag are in the boot. X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip : and place the skis or snowboards inside it. X X Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal pattern on hooks ? in lashing eyelets A as shown. Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368). The outside and the middle rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity. The division ratio is 40% to 20% to 40%. Z Stowing and features Ski/snowboard bag 371 Stowage areas 372 Folding the rear seat backrest forward Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards. X Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forwards, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. X Open the boot. X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints. Stowing and features X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest ; forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Left and right seat backrest X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. Left and right seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Middle rear seat backrest X Pull release lever ; forwards. Rear seat backrest : is released. Stowage areas To lock: fold the left and centre seat backrests forward. Make sure that the centre and left seat backrests are engaged and joined together. X Slide catch : upwards. The release mechanism of the centre seat backrest is locked. X To unlock: fold back the left and centre seat backrests. X Slide catch : downwards from inside the boot. 373 Middle rear seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 121). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X If you do not need the through-loading feature, you should always engage the rear seat backrests. This will prevent unauthorised access to the boot from the vehicle interior. Locking the centre rear seat backrest Securing a load Lashing eyelets General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 368). RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are only intended as an antislip protection for light loads. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Boot In order to prevent the boot from being accessed by unauthorised persons, the centre seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The centre seat backrest can only be folded forward together with the left seat backrest. Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat Z Stowing and features X Stowage areas 374 X Fold up the lashing eyelets next to the rear seat backrest and put them through the slots in the carpet. Stowing and features Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. : Bag hook frame of the box or pushed onto the frame from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. ! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury. Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects in the EASY-PACK boot box. Always store and secure these or similar objects in the boot outside of the EASYPACK boot box. ! If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box, objects can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK boot box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box. Always store and secure heavy objects in the boot outside of the EASY-PACK boot box. The maximum permitted load of the EASYPACK boot box is 10 kg. With a load of above approximately 5 kg, the bottom of the box moves downward until it rests on the mat of the boot floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided. Adjusting the height to any position EASY-PACK boot box Important safety notes G WARNING When the load surface moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK boot box. There is a risk of injury. When the load surface moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the centre of the load surface downward. ! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the Example Stowage areas To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise by 90°. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Stowage well under the boot floor ! Remove the handle again before closing the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Removing and fitting Example X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots = Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°. X The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Z Stowing and features Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X To lower the load surface: push the centre of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surface ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. X To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. X 375 376 Features Roof carrier Important safety notes Stowing and features G WARNING sunroof, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised in the rear. Attaching the roof carrier When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the handling changes. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the handling as well as steering and braking characteristics are severely affected. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the maximum roof load and adapt your driving style. The maximum roof load can be found in the "Technical data" (Y page 476). ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is fitted you can: Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof fully Ropen the boot lid fully ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: if a roof carrier is fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof cannot be opened. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the panorama sliding sunroof. If a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz makes contact with the panorama sliding Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid. Features 377 ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368). Cup holders in the front centre console If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Vehicles with manual transmission: To remove: slide upper cup holder sections : on the driver's and frontpassenger sides inwards until they release. X Slide the cup holder forwards slightly and then pull it upwards ;. X To fit: insert the cup holder at the front and then slide it backwards until it reaches edge = of the underside of the stowage compartment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge of the upper section of the cup holder faces forwards. X Slide upper cup holder sections : on the driver's and front-passenger sides outwards, until both left and right sides ; engage. X You can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Vehicles with automatic transmission: To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X To remove: slide catch = forwards and pull out cup holder ;. X Z Stowing and features G WARNING Features 378 To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back catch =. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Sun visors Overview Stowing and features You can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : ; = ? A Mirror light Retainer Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To fold out: place a container in the cup holder. The cup holder folds down automatically. X To fold in: remove the container. The cup holder folds in automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Roller sunblinds in the rear side windows ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the motorway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, Features X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top of the window. Rear window roller sunblind Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could be trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again if someone becomes trapped. The opening/ closing process is stopped. Extending/retracting the roller sunblind Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and retracts into the out-of-use position. X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Z Stowing and features either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. 379 Features 380 Vehicles with manual transmission: Rear-compartment ashtray To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X To remove the insert: hold the sides of insert =, push it forward and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. Stowing and features X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. To remove the insert: push ribbing = from the left side and pull insert : upwards. X To fit the insert: fit insert : into the holder from above and press down into the holder until it engages. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission: To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its right side =. X To remove the insert: hold the sides of insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert ? into the holder until it engages. X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. X Push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. Features 381 12 V sockets General notes Vehicles with manual transmission: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as bulbs or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-off ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. This prevents the cover from being blocked. Socket in the front centre console Vehicles with automatic transmission: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Vehicles with manual transmission: To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Z Stowing and features X Features 382 RUse only connector cables that are dry and free of damage. RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry. have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialised workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. RNever plug the connector cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. Stowing and features RImmediately Vehicles with automatic transmission: To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 369). X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Socket in the rear-compartment centre console G DANGER If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. Only attach appropriate objects to the power socket. ! Note that work and repairs on the 230 V power socket should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel. General notes X X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket :. 230 V socket Important safety notes G DANGER When a suitable device is connected, the 230 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 230 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. The 230 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 230 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, must not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether. Do not connect any multiple socket outlets to the 230 V power socket. Requirements for operating these devices: Rthe electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in. Rthe electronic device connector is plugged into the 230 V power socket. Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts. Rthe on-board voltage is within a permissible voltage range. Rthe 12 V socket in the front centre console is working properly (Y page 381). Features 383 Stowing and features Using the 230 V power socket To switch on: switch the ignition on. Open flap =. X Insert the electronic device connector into 230 V power socket :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X To switch off: remove the connector from 230 V power socket :. Make sure that you do not pull on the cable. X X Z 384 Features Problems with the 230 V power socket Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Stowing and features The warning lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak. the 230 V power socket X Start the engine. is not lit. or X Charge the battery (Y page 416). If the indicator lamp still does not light up: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high. X Remove the electronic device connector from the 230 V socket. X Let the DC/AC converter cool down. If the indicator lamp still does not light up after the converter cools down: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switchon current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 230 V power socket will not supply it with power. X Connect a suitable electronic device. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on these requirements can be found in the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. To open: press cover : briefly. X To make an emergency call: press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. X After the emergency call, close cover :. You will see a message if: X Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre cannot be made Ra call has not been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre In this case, dial the 112 emergency number on your mobile phone. You can find more information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. Mercedes-Benz Contact General notes Mercedes-Benz Contact offers fast assistance at the touch of a button – around the clock. For any queries about the vehicle, Mercedes-Benz Contact offers a fast and easy connecting call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You can, for example, request an appointment or call for help in the event of a breakdown. The Audio 20/COMAND Online display indicates that a call is active. During the call you change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button in Audio 20/COMAND Online, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. You can find more information about Mercedes-Benz Contact in the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions. Breakdown assistance call button X To call breakdown assistance: press button : for breakdown assistance. The breakdown assistance call is initiated. The Connecting call callmessage appears in the multifunction display. The audio system is muted. Only in certain countries: a voice message prompts you to confirm the data transmis- sion. After confirmation, the required vehicle data is transmitted. During data transmission, you will see a corresponding symbol in the display. This may take a moment. You are then connected to an employee. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding Audio 20/ COMAND Online button to end a call. Info call button This function is not available in all countries. To call: press info call button :. The breakdown assistance call is initiated. The Connecting call callmessage appears in the multifunction display. The audio system is muted. Only in certain countries: a voice message prompts you to confirm the data transmission. After confirmation, the required vehicle data is transmitted. During data transmission, you will see a corresponding symbol in the display. This may take a moment. You are then connected to an employee. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding Audio 20/ COMAND Online button to end a call. X Z 385 Stowing and features Features 386 Features Mobile phone Stowing and features Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 466). Rthe General notes Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to COMAND Online/Audio 20 can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Ron Using a mobile phone To connect a mobile phone to the exterior aerial and charge it, insert it into the mobile phone bracket. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 370). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. i The mobile phone can also be operated without being in the bracket. However, the charging function and aerial function are not available. In order to use Bluetooth® (SAP profile) on your telephone module, you must first insert the telephone module into the pre-installed fitting. This connects it to the exterior aerial. If you wish to charge the mobile phone, then you must connect it to a USB port. Further information on the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Features Operating the mobile phone X You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 304). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the vehicle. You can then no longer make calls using the hands-free system. If a call is active and you remove the key from the ignition lock, the conversation is transferred over to the mobile telephone. It is then possible to continue the conversation on the mobile phone. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. X Slide the relevant seat back. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. Z Stowing and features Retrofitted anti-glare film Floormats X 387 388 389 Useful information ............................ 390 Engine compartment ........................ 390 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 395 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 396 390 Engine compartment Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Maintenance and care els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Engine compartment Bonnet Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open while driving and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet while driving. G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you could receive an electric shock. There is a danger of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle ! An active bonnet that had been triggered must be repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet function will then be available again. The additional pedestrian protection provided by the active bonnet will then be restored. The active bonnet is only available in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is raised at the rear in the area around the hinge by approximately 85 mm. The active bonnet is triggered by pyrotechnics. Engine compartment Resetting G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Example Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X X With your hand flat, push down active bonnet : in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows) until you feel it engage. If you can raise the active bonnet slightly in the area around the hinges, it is not engaged correctly. Repeat the step. Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Z Maintenance and care For the drive to the workshop, reset the triggered active bonnet yourself. If the active bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. 391 Engine compartment 392 Closing the bonnet Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. Maintenance and care X Radiator Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Do not cover up the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protection covers or anything similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics System to display inaccurate values. Some of these values are legally required and must always be correct. Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Engine compartment 393 H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Example Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 392). X X For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 473). Other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine cooling system is under pressure, particularly if the engine is warm. You could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when opening the cap. There is a danger of injury. Z Maintenance and care G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. Engine compartment 394 Allow the engine to cool before opening the cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow pressure to escape. warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Maintenance and care For further information on coolant, see (Y page 475). Topping up the windscreen washer system G WARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 181). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70 †. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 181) in the ignition lock. or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when X Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. ASSYST PLUS If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to top up the washer fluid (Y page 349). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 476). will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date shown in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X ASSYST PLUS After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 392). The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you RService Hiding service messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Maintenance and care To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and open. X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X 395 396 Care Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. Maintenance and care A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used for travelling short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have the air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. Care Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Make sure: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0 Rthe 360° camera or reversing camera is switched off. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Rthe ! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the boot lid opening unintentionally: Rusing a car wash a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away from the vehicle. Rusing ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the key: Do not remove the key from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral: Operating with the key: Make sure the ignition is switched on. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Select neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X Operating with the Start/Stop button: Make sure the ignition is switched on. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Select park position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 181). X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Select neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X X You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper Z Maintenance and care is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: 397 398 Care blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Maintenance and care Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical ! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the boot lid opening unintentionally: Rusing a car wash a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away from the vehicle. Rusing When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. Cleaning the paintwork High-pressure cleaning equipment ! Do not affix: G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Care Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. Z Maintenance and care Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X 399 Care 400 ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Maintenance and care X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the mirror turn signal ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning AIRPANEL ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in the radiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, the adjustment range of the shutters may be restricted. The actuation mechanics of the radiator trim must then be cleaned with a high-pressure cleaner. Care 401 Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Shutters : open automatically after approximately 120 seconds. X Clean the location points of shutters ; in the radiator trim with a high-pressure cleaner. X ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open the cover of the reversing camera: with COMAND Online or Audio 20 activated, call up the vehicle menu: press the Ñ button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide ¬ the controller. X To select System settings: settings turn and press the controller. X To select Rear view camera: camera turn and press the controller. X To select Open camera cover: cover turn and press the controller. The reversing camera cover opens. X To clean the reversing camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Cleaning the 360° camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the 360° camera with a high-pressure cleaner.360 ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Z Maintenance and care Cleaning the sensors Care 402 Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open the cover of the 360° camera: with COMAND Online or Audio 20 activated, call up the vehicle menu: press the Ñ button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide ¬ the controller. X To select System settings: settings turn and press the controller. X To select the 360° camera camera: turn and press the controller. X To select Open camera cover: cover turn and press the controller. The cover of the 360° camera opens. X To clean the 360° camera: clean camera lens : with clear water and a soft cloth. Maintenance and care X If you drive at speeds above 30 km/h or with the key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360° camera closes automatically. Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions. The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball coupling. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive Care Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences Z Maintenance and care Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X 403 Care 404 These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Maintenance and care Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X 405 Useful information ............................ 406 Where will I find...? ........................... 406 Flat tyre ............................................. 408 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 412 Jump-starting .................................... 418 Towing away and tow-starting ........ 420 Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses ................................. 424 Where will I find...? 406 Useful information Setting up the warning triangle i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Breakdown assistance ist workshops: (Y page 27). Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing/replacing the warning triangle To remove: open the boot lid. Push warning triangle holder : on both sides in the direction of the arrow and open it. X Remove warning triangle ;. X To replace: place warning triangle ; back into warning triangle holder :. X Close warning triangle holder :. X X X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud :. First-aid kit The first-aid kit : is in the boot in the lefthand stowage net. X Open the boot lid. X Remove first-aid kit :. Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year :. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Where will I find...? Fire extinguisher Rratchet 407 ring spanner pin Rcentring X X Pull tab : upwards. Remove fire extinguisher ;. Have fire extinguisher ; refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. Vehicle tool kit General notes The towing eye is located in the stowage well under the boot floor. In vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) and in hybrid vehicles, the towing eye is located in a bracket under the parcel shelf. Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changing tools. If the vehicle is equipped with tyrechanging tools, these are kept in the stowage well under the boot floor. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tyre changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, for example: Rjack Rwheel chock Rwheel wrench (Example) : Tyre inflation compressor ; Tyre sealant filler bottle = Towing eye Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 375). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 409). X X Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit (Example) : Tyre inflation compressor ; Tyre sealant filler bottle = Wheel wrench ? Folding wheel chock A Jack B Towing eye The tyre-change tool kit is kept in a tray in the stowage well under the boot floor. Breakdown assistance Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Flat tyre 408 X X Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 375). Breakdown assistance Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) and hybrid vehicles : Towing eye To remove the towing eye: open the boot lid. X Pull towing eye : to the left and remove it. X To replace the towing eye: slide towing eye : with the thread into the rear end of the bracket. X Push towing eye : on the eyelet towards the right until it engages in the bracket. X Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- acteristics) (Y page 408) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 407) Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (Y page 461) Vehicles with an Mercedes-Benz emergency call system which are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit: in the event of a flat tyre, contact the Customer Assistance Centre for the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (Y page 384). Information on changing/fitting a wheel (Y page 437). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 181). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance (Y page 406). Observe legal requirements. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected Flat tyre sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes sages (Y page 343) the tyre for damage Rif driving on, observe the following notes The maximum driving distance is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Rspeed Ryou Robserve the instructions in the display mesRcheck Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you use only: Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle and Rtyre(s) marked "MOExtended" If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. Z Breakdown assistance tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitoring system. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: 409 410 Flat tyre G WARNING Using the TIREFIT kit In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance Rthere G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the boot floor (Y page 407). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X Flat tyre 411 Tyre pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of five minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 381) in your vehicle. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). X If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure reached" (Y page 411). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure not reached" (Y page 411). If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Z Breakdown assistance X Battery (vehicle) 412 H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X Breakdown assistance X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X X Battery (vehicle) 12 V battery - important safety notes Hybrid vehicles are equipped with a 12 V battery and a high-voltage battery. The following notes refer to the 12 V battery. Notes on the high-voltage battery can be obtained in the "High-voltage battery – important safety notes" section (Y page 415). Battery (vehicle) G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery may lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit. This, in turn, may restrict the functions of the safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may then be compromised. You could then lose control of the vehicle, e.g.: Rwhen braking making sudden steering movements and/or travelling at an inappropriate speed. There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or similar situation, inform a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rwhen i For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 74) and (Y page 80). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing to friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth Rdue G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepZ Breakdown assistance Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 413 414 Battery (vehicle) arately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Breakdown assistance ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12volt battery yourself, please observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Rswitch off the engine and remove the key. Make sure the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, you may damage electronic components such as the alternator, for example. Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminal clamp, followed by the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. The vehicle electronics may otherwise be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The batteries and the covers of the positive terminal clamps must always be fitted securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. WARNING Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Battery (vehicle) High-voltage battery - important safety notes Only hybrid vehicles are equipped with a highvoltage battery. G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Do not touch any high-voltage components after an accident and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery could exceed a critical value. In this case, flammable gas escapes through a vent valve in the vehicle's underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger area immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. ! Only charge the high-voltage battery in the "Charging when stationary" operating mode. Do not connect a battery charger to the high-voltage battery. Otherwise, the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system could be damaged. ! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehicle standing idle for lengthy periods can damage the high-voltage battery. If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods, run it for a few minutes once every six weeks to charge up the high-voltage battery. During the charging process, switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. the automatic climate control or the seat heating. If you wish to park your vehicle for several weeks, ensure that the battery is at least 30% charged. If necessary, charge the high-voltage battery while stationary before parking the vehicle (Y page 416). Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. Z Breakdown assistance For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Hybrid vehicles: if the battery charge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery can also supply the 12 V battery with energy. This only happens if the battery charge of the 12 V battery requires this, e.g. after using electrical consumers for an extended period with the engine switched off. As the on-board voltage is continuously monitored this can also be performed when the engine is switched off. The battery charge of the 12 V battery and the on-board voltage are thereby kept stable for a longer period. 415 416 Battery (vehicle) Charging the 12 V battery G WARNING Breakdown assistance During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. is available as an accessory. This device permits charging of the battery in position. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Hybrid vehicles: if the battery charge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery can also supply the 12 V battery with energy. This only happens if the battery charge of the 12 V battery requires this, e.g. after using electrical consumers for an extended period with the engine switched off. As the on-board voltage is continuously monitored this can also be performed when the engine is switched off. The battery charge of the 12 V battery and the on-board voltage are thereby kept stable for a longer period. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 418). X Open the bonnet. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 418). Never charge the battery if it is still fitted to the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz Charging the high-voltage battery when stationary Only hybrid vehicles are equipped with a highvoltage battery. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. ! Only charge the high-voltage battery in the "Charging when stationary" operating mode. Do not connect a battery charger to the high-voltage battery. Otherwise, the Battery (vehicle) 417 vehicle's high-voltage electrical system could be damaged. X Stop the vehicle if the internal combustion engine is running. The internal combustion engine drives the electric motor. The electric motor is operating as an alternator. The high-voltage battery is charging. Breakdown assistance If the high-voltage battery is too heavily discharged, recharge the high-voltage battery to at least 60% of its capacity. In the "Charging when stationary" operating mode, you can observe the charge status of the high-voltage battery up to a maximum of 70% in the COMAND display and in the multifunction display (Y page 274). Z 418 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting 419 Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 181). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 181). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. RThe Z Breakdown assistance RThe Breakdown assistance 420 Towing away and tow-starting Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to earth point ? of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First, remove the jump leads from earth point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover A of positive clamp : after removing the jump leads. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Hybrid vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing away and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running Rthe brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Towing away and tow-starting PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing away a car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Shift the automatic transmission to N and er's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 468). Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. Vehicles with automatic transmission: when towing a vehicle, the automatic transmission must be in position N. If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission Deactivate the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 98). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 86) before the vehicle is towed. do not open the driver's or front passeng- Z Breakdown assistance ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST 421 Towing away and tow-starting 422 Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye Towing the vehicle away with the rear axle raised Hybrid vehicles: towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised should only be carried out by professional recovery companies. Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Breakdown assistance with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray (Y page 407). X Press the mark on cover : inwards and remove. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 137). X Move the front wheels to the straightahead position. X If necessary, turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key with you. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have a bracket at the back for the screw-in towing eye. Connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch (Y page 284). When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 420). Removing the towing eye Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/ stowage tray. X X X Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground Hybrid vehicles: hybrid vehicles may not be towed away with both axles on the ground if: Rthe multifunction display is not working or multifunction display shows the ~ Malfunction or Rd Malfunction is displayed If the vehicle is in a dangerous location it may be towed from the danger zone with both axles on the ground. In this case, the towing distance may not be greater than 50 m and Rthe Towing away and tow-starting Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X X Vehicles with manual transmission: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Vehicles with manual or automatic transmission: Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 137). X In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. Transporting the vehicle Hybrid vehicles: transportation of the vehicle should only be carried out by professional recovery companies. ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. Z Breakdown assistance the towing speed must not exceed 10 km/h. For longer distances, have the vehicle loaded and transported or towed with the rear axle raised. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: 423 424 Electrical fuses In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 418). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Breakdown assistance Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic transmission. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-start- ing" under (Y page 418). Before tow-starting, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected engine has cooled down Rthe exhaust system has cooled down When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety notes (Y page 420) and the legal requirements in each respective country. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 137). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 422). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and continue to keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. Rthe When the engine has been started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 422). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. X Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Electrical fuses 425 Before replacing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 181). or X When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 181). X Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard Rfuse box in the front-passenger footwell Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side Rfuse box under the boot floor on the righthand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the boot (Y page 426). Open the driver's door. To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bottom in the direction of arrow =. X Fold cover : outwards in the direction of arrow ;. X X X Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a To close: fold in cover : until it engages. X Open the front-passenger door. X Open the front-passenger door. To open: fold cover : out towards the rear and remove it. screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X X X To close: clip in cover : at the rear. Fold cover : forwards until it engages. Z Breakdown assistance All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Electrical fuses 426 Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it Breakdown assistance is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Open the bonnet. To open: press safety clips : on the cover together. X Remove fuse box cover ; upwards. To close: check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid ?. X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten screws =. X Fuse box in the boot ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X X Open the boot lid. Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 375). X To open: swing cover : upwards in the direction of the arrow. X X X To close: fold down cover : in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the cover is in the recess provided for it. i The fuse allocation chart is in a recess on the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and remove it. X 427 Useful information ............................ 428 Important safety notes ..................... 428 Operation ........................................... 428 Winter operation ............................... 430 Tyre pressure .................................... 432 Changing a wheel .............................. 437 Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 444 Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel ................... 461 428 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 444). Information on air pressure for the tyres on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 202) Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 432) Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon Operation Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 432). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 461). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style pressure Rmileage Rtyre Important safety notes on the tyre tread G WARNING Rpunctures Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rtears Rsummer Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres in the tyres on the tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 429). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any Rbulges tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Z Wheels and tyres as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 429 Wheels and tyres 430 Winter operation Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. sure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 408). Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These requirements can stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 408). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 461). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with an activated tyre pres- equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 438). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they Winter operation At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 221). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: Check the tyre pressures (Y page 432). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 437). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 435). X X Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 461). Snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever Rfit fit snow chains on the front wheels snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheeltyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 444). Ronly use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Ron vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 234). You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 81) when pulling away with snow chains fitted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Z Wheels and tyres do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. 431 432 Tyre pressure Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 461). Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Wheels and tyres Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Rat least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rwhen G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Operation with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 461). Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information label apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Tyre pressure Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed at which you are driving and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Rcause For Saloons at speeds of up to 210 km/h (does not apply to AMG vehicles, AMG Sport models): despite what is stated on the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler flap), at speeds of up to 210 km/h the values stated can be reduced as follows, without a reduction in safety: RSaloons (except Eco models): Ò30 kPa (Ò0.3 bar/Ò4 psi) RSaloons (Eco models with 16 or 17 in tyres on both axles): Ò60 kPa (Ò0.6 bar/ Ò9 psi) This does not apply to vehicles towing a trailer. This improves the ride comfort of your vehicle; however, fuel consumption may increase slightly. Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example). Z Wheels and tyres Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: 433 434 Tyre pressure For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 434). Wheels and tyres Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 432). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 435). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 432). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Further information can be found under (Y page 343). If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 181) in the ignition lock. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or Tyre pressure Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. RIf the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly and the tyres must be checked. RIf the Warning, tyre defect appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 343). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. After a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 432). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be dis‐ played after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message. X Press the : button. The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. Z Wheels and tyres new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, for a few minutes the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. 435 Tyre pressure 436 After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Wheels and tyres Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Dubai TRA, Registered NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 Mhz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Country Radio type approval number Moldova 1024 Philippines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306995C Serbia И 011 12 Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 437). Important safety notes The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 432). The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on sev- Changing a wheel Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 432). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181). Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre pressure now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or If the Tyre pressure now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Changing a wheel Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 408). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 408). Z Wheels and tyres eral tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: 437 438 Changing a wheel Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare wheel is fitted according to the description under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 438). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Wheels and tyres Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 438). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 437) or the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 435). Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably dark place if they are not being used. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Move the front wheels to the straightahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that in vehicles with AIRMATIC, the vehicle level is set to "Normal" (Y page 234). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Changing a wheel Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 181). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X 439 Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X X i Apart from some country-specific var- Securing the vehicle on level ground X Rjack Rwheel chock wrench Rcentring pin On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Rwheel Securing the vehicle against rolling away Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 407). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. On slight downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Z Wheels and tyres iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyrechanging tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary wheel-changing tools may include, for example: 440 Changing a wheel must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Rto Wheels and tyres raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suitable for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Do not release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the boot lid when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with steel wheels and wheel trim: the wheel trim covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Steel wheel with wheel trim X Using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. Vehicles with light-alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be fitted. Light-alloy wheel with plastic hub cap Vehicles with plastic hub cap: To remove: turn the centre cover of hub cap : anti-clockwise and remove. X To fit: before fitting, ensure that hub cap : is in the open position. To do so, turn the centre cover anti-clockwise. X Changing a wheel 441 Put hub cap : in position and turn the centre cover clockwise until you feel and hear hub cap : engage. X Make sure that hub cap : is fitted securely. X X Using wheel wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Light-alloy wheel with aluminium hub cap To remove: take socket ; and wheel wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 407). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach wheel wrench = to socket ; and loosen hub cap : anti-clockwise. X Remove hub cap :. X To fit: before fitting, check hub cap : and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach wheel wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. The tightening torque must be 25 Nm. X The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). Vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers fitted next to the jacking points on the outer sills. i Note that the hub cap should be tight- ened to the specified torque of 25 Nm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. X Vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ? upwards. Z Wheels and tyres Vehicles with aluminium hub cap: Changing a wheel 442 Wheels and tyres X Position jack B at jacking point A. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Fitting a new wheel X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits completely on jacking point A and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank C until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. When fitting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake discs. This could impair the level of comfort when braking. G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 438). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been Changing a wheel 443 approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the tyrechange tool kit in the boot again. X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 432). Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel (Y page 462). Only then lower the vehicle. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The rim could otherwise be damaged. If you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure control system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Z Wheels and tyres X 444 Wheel and tyre combinations Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) Wheels and tyres RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 432). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: RFA: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 408). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted at the factory in all countries. Wheel and tyre combinations 445 Tyres C 180 Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Wheels and tyres R 17 R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 1 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 446 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Wheels and tyres Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 V M+S i1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 Tyres BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL Wheels M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Available as MOExtended tyres. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 4 Wheel and tyre combinations 447 C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 R 17 Tyres BA: 225/50 R17 94 Wheels W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 Wheels and tyres Winter tyres R 16 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 C 180 BlueTEC Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 1 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 448 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 V M+S i1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 Available as MOExtended tyres. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 4 Wheel and tyre combinations 449 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 C 200 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 16 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 Available as MOExtended tyres. Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 3 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 450 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Wheels and tyres Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 C 200 BlueTEC Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 Available as MOExtended tyres. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 4 Wheel and tyre combinations Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 451 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres R 18 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V M+S i1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 452 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Wheels and tyres C 220 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36 BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMG Line Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 453 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 C 220 BlueTEC Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Wheels and tyres R 17 R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Available as MOExtended tyres. Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 3 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 454 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 C 220 CDI Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 455 R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Wheels and tyres R 19 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Available as MOExtended tyres. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 4 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 456 C 250 Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 W2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Wheels and tyres R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 457 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Wheels and tyres R 18 C 250 BlueTEC Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 W2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 458 R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Available as MOExtended tyres. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 2 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 4 Wheel and tyre combinations 459 C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 Wheels and tyres R 18 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres BA: 225/50 R17 94 H Wheels M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 R 18 3 4 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Available as MOExtended tyres. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). Z Wheel and tyre combinations 460 C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid Summer tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 W2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54 BA: 225/50 R17 94 Wheels and tyres Wheels W3 R 18 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56 FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49 R 19 Tyres Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5 FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL3, 4 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44 RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). 2 Emergency spare wheel 461 Winter tyres R 16 Tyres Wheels BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38 BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48 R 17 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5 Tyres Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44 Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: RAdapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. General notes You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 432). The value on the wheel is valid. In addition, the emergency spare wheel tyre pressure can be found under "Technical data" (Y page 464). Not in conjunction with AMG Line exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486). 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 2 Z Wheels and tyres R 18 Wheels and tyres 462 Emergency spare wheel An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. If you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Removing the emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the boot. X Open the boot. X Detach the fastening straps. X Unhook retaining spring hooks of fastening straps from the retainers. X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the emergency spare wheel. X Open the bag and remove the emergency spare wheel. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 438). Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Mount the collapsible emergency spare wheel as described (Y page 437). The collapsible emergency spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Screw union nut : of the air hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. X Press the Start/Stop button once. or X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X Emergency spare wheel Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release valve button ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle. 463 Wheels and tyres X Z Emergency spare wheel 464 Technical data "Minispare" emergency spare wheel5 Light-alloy wheels T 135/80 R17 103 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 19.5 Wheels and tyres Tyres 5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 465 Useful information ............................ 466 Information on technical data ......... 466 Vehicle electronics ........................... 466 Identification plates ......................... 468 Service products and capacities ..... 468 Vehicle data ....................................... 476 Technical data Trailer tow hitch ................................ 477 466 Vehicle electronics Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Information on technical data You can find current technical data on the Internet on our Mercedes‑Benz homepage. Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in an improper way, its electromagnetic radiation can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if: Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial This can jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Robserve Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discus- Vehicle electronics Approved aerial positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear wing ? Boot lid i On vehicles with panorama sliding sun- roof, fitting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear wing, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 78 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW Rmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/ LTE) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: Rtrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband RGSM/UMTS/LTE R70 Z Technical data sion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. 467 Service products and capacities 468 from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) VIN Technical data X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering ; upwards. The VIN is visible :. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 468). Only for certain countries: the VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windscreen. Example: vehicles with a trailer tow hitch : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. countries) ? VIN A Maximum permissible gross vehicle Service products and capacities B G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. C D E weight (kg) Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination (kg) (only for specific countries) Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate Important safety notes Service products and capacities Service products include the following: Rfuels Rexhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. AdBlue® Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. R0 W-30 W-30 R5 W-40 Further information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. R5 Z Technical data H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. 469 470 Service products and capacities Tank capacity The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Technical data Model Total capacity C 180 (only for certain countries) C 200 (only for certain countries) C 250 (only for certain countries) C 220 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY Edition (only for certain countries) 66.0 l C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 41.0 l C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 50.0 l All other models 41.0 l or 66.0 l Fuel of this specification can contain up to 10 % ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear and damage the engine and exhaust system. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) Rpetrol with additives containing metal RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by MercedesBenz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RE100 Model Of which reserve fuel All models Approx. 7.0 l Petrol Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea- ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent specification. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. C 180, C 250: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 93 RON/83 MON. All other models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an Service products and capacities i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 201). C 200, C 250 ! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ 85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Diesel Fuel grade G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. Rheating ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulphur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change Z Technical data octane rating of 91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON/MON. 471 472 Service products and capacities at shorter intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Technical data Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. Information on refuelling (Y page 201). Low outside temperatures In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climatedependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions. i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-temperature resistance can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain Rwhen towing a trailer Rin i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were, in each case, based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with standards up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the Euro 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. AdBlue® Important safety notes AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnon-toxic Rcolourless and odourless Rnon-flammable If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. You may also experience coughing and watery eyes. Service products and capacities Capacities The total capacity of the AdBlue® tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Low outside temperatures Model AdBlue® All models freezes at a temperature of approximately -11 †. The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating system. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even at temperatures below -11 †. Total capacity 8.5 l or 24.5 l Engine oil Additives General notes ! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 468). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. 22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. Purity ! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: Rincreased emission values to the catalytic converter Rengine damage Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust gas aftertreatment system Rdamage Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank, e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid to refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed. Z Technical data Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in wellventilated areas. 473 474 Service products and capacities Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Petrol engines All models Technical data Diesel engines with a diesel particle filter MB Approval 229.5 MB Approval C 180 BlueTEC C 200 BlueTEC 226.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 All other models 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 Diesel engines without a diesel particle filter MB Approval All models 228.3, 228.5, 228.51, 229.3, 229.31, 229.5, 229.51 Petrol engines All models Replacement amount 7.0 l Diesel engines Replacement amount C 180 BlueTEC C 200 BlueTEC 6.5 l All other models 6.0 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 This must only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Service products and capacities G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 468). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1 . The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures Z Technical data Brake fluid 475 Vehicle data 476 adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. Technical data ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 468) Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle Dimensions and weights Trailer tow hitch Model : Opening height C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 1763 mm C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1774 mm C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1768 mm All other models 1763 mm 477 The retrofitting of a trailer tow hitch is only permissible if a towing weight is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, then the vehicle is not approved for the towing of a trailer. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). Vehicle length 4686 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2020 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1810 mm Wheelbase 2840 mm Maximum roof load 75 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Model Vehicle height C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1452 mm C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1447 mm All other models 1442 mm : Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including the protective covering is 1,158 mm. Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis. Z Technical data All models 478 Trailer tow hitch Trailer loads Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8% from a standstill). Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). Manual transmission Automatic transmission C 180 1400 kg 1800 kg C 200 1600 kg 1800 kg C 220 BlueTEC 1800 kg 1800 kg Technical data Automatic transmission C 180 BlueTEC 1800 kg C 250 1800 kg C 220 CDI 1800 kg C 250 BlueTEC 1800 kg C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1800 kg C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1800 kg Manual transmission C 200 BlueTEC 1600 kg Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill). Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). Manual transmission Automatic transmission C 180 1400 kg 1800 kg C 200 1600 kg 1800 kg C 220 BlueTEC 1800 kg 1800 kg Automatic transmission C 180 BlueTEC 1800 kg C 250 1800 kg C 220 CDI 1800 kg Trailer tow hitch 479 Automatic transmission C 250 BlueTEC 1800 kg C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1800 kg C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1800 kg Manual transmission C 200 BlueTEC 1600 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). Manual transmission Automatic transmission C 180 700 kg 715 kg C 200 725 kg 735 kg C 220 BlueTEC 750 kg 750 kg C 180 BlueTEC 750 kg C 250 735 kg C 220 CDI 750 kg C 250 BlueTEC 750 kg C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 750 kg C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 750 kg Technical data Automatic transmission Manual transmission C 200 BlueTEC 740 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload. Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. Z 480 Trailer tow hitch Manual transmission Automatic transmission C 180 75 kg 75 kg C 200 75 kg 75 kg C 220 BlueTEC 75 kg 75 kg Automatic transmission C 180 BlueTEC 75 kg C 250 75 kg C 220 CDI 75 kg C 250 BlueTEC 75 kg C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 75 kg C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 75 kg Manual transmission Technical data C 200 BlueTEC 75 kg However, the actual noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch identification plate. In addition, a distinction should be made between towing a trailer and using a carrier system on the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch. Note also that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight. You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball coupling. Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284). Manual transmission Automatic transmission C 180 1170 kg 1170 kg C 200 1190 kg 1185 kg C 220 BlueTEC 1215 kg 1210 kg Automatic transmission C 180 BlueTEC 1190 kg C 250 1180 kg Trailer tow hitch 481 Automatic transmission C 220 CDI 1145 kg C 250 BlueTEC 1205 kg C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1220 kg C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1290 kg Manual transmission 1170 kg Technical data C 200 BlueTEC Z 482 483 484